Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Operator's Manual M-Class: Order No. 6515 4274 13 Part No. 164 584 72 81 Edition A 2008
Operator's Manual M-Class: Order No. 6515 4274 13 Part No. 164 584 72 81 Edition A 2008
Operator’s Manual
M-Class
M-Class
1 6 4 5 8 4 7 2 8 1
Order No. 6515 4274 13 Part No. 164 584 72 81 Edition A 2008
ML 320 CDI
ML 350
ML 550
ML 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully,
on the purchase of your new then return it to your vehicle where it
Mercedes-Benz. will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and occu-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, pants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Control system .................................. 147 Transfer case...................................... 198 3-zone automatic climate control*..... 218
Multifunction display.................... 147 Good visibility ..................................... 199 Deactivating the
Multifunction steering wheel........ 148 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 199 automatic climate
Menus .......................................... 150 Rear view mirrors.......................... 199 control system.............................. 222
Standard display menu ................ 154 Power folding exterior Operating the automatic
AMG menu ................................... 156 rear view mirrors*......................... 200 climate control system
Off-road Mode menu .................... 159 Sun visors ..................................... 201 in automatic mode........................ 223
AUDIO menu ................................ 160 Rear window defroster.................. 203 Setting the temperature ............... 223
NAV* menu.................................. 161 Climate control................................... 204 Adjusting air distribution .............. 224
AIRMATIC*/Compass menu ........ 162 Deactivating the Adjusting air volume ..................... 225
Vehicle status message climate control system ................. 208 Front defroster ............................. 225
memory menu .............................. 162 Operating the climate control Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 226
Settings menu.............................. 163 system in automatic mode............ 208 Air recirculation mode .................. 227
Vehicle configuration ................... 177 Setting the temperature................ 209 Air conditioning ............................ 229
Trip computer menu..................... 178 Adjusting air distribution............... 209 Using driver-side settings
TEL* menu ................................... 180 Adjusting air volume ..................... 210 for all temperature zones.............. 229
Automatic transmission..................... 183 Front defroster.............................. 210 Residual heat and ventilation........ 230
Gear selector lever....................... 183 Air recirculation mode .................. 212 Rear automatic climate control..... 231
Shifting procedure ....................... 186 Air conditioning............................. 214 Power windows .................................. 235
Transmission positions................. 187 Residual heat and ventilation........ 215 Door windows............................... 236
Driving tips................................... 190 Rear climate control*.................... 216 Synchronizing the door windows .. 237
Gear ranges ................................. 192 Summer opening feature .............. 237
Steering wheel gearshift control .. 193 Convenience closing feature......... 238
Shift program (ML 63 AMG only).. 194 Power tilt/sliding sunroof .................. 240
Emergency operation Opening and closing ..................... 240
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 197 Synchronizing ............................... 242
Contents
Replacing bulbs ................................. 463 Fuses ................................................. 504 Electrical system ............................... 519
Bulbs ............................................ 463 Fuse box in Main Dimensions............................... 520
Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 466 engine compartment.................... 505 Weights ............................................. 521
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 471 Fuse box in Fuels, coolants, lubricants................. 522
Adjusting headlamp aim............... 473 cargo compartment...................... 505 Capacities .................................... 522
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 475 Fuse box in passenger Engine oils ................................... 525
Front wiper blades ....................... 475 compartment ............................... 506 Engine oil additives ...................... 525
Rear wiper blade .......................... 476 Emergency engine shut-down ...... 506 Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 525
Flat tire .............................................. 478 Brake fluid.................................... 525
Preparing the vehicle.................... 478 Premium unleaded gasoline
Mounting the spare wheel............ 479 Technical data ................................. 507 (gasoline engine).......................... 526
Bleeding the fuel system Parts service...................................... 508 Fuel requirements........................ 526
(diesel engine only) ............................ 488 Warranty coverage............................. 509 Gasoline additives
Battery ............................................... 489 Loss of Service and Warranty (gasoline engine).......................... 527
Disconnecting, removing, Information Booklet ..................... 509 Coolants ...................................... 528
reinstalling and Identification labels ........................... 510 Windshield washer system and
reconnecting the battery.............. 491 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 512 headlamp cleaning system*......... 530
Charging the battery .................... 496 ML 320 CDI.................................. 512
Jump starting ..................................... 497 ML 350, ML 550 .......................... 512
Towing the vehicle ............................. 499 ML 63 AMG .................................. 512 Index................................................. 531
Installing towing eye bolt.............. 501 Engine................................................ 513
Stranded vehicle .......................... 503 Rims and tires.................................... 515
Same size tires............................. 516
Spare wheel ................................. 518
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at any
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies Center where you will receive comprehen-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- sive information, also on permissible tech-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, nical modifications, and where proper
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. installation will be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Light Truck Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, any you of correct care and operating proce-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck dures.
Center will be glad to demonstrate the The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
proper procedures. Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
authorized repair or service facilities fail to
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center
fix one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the
ly notified us in writing of the need for
period of 18 months from original delivery
its repair, or
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make
sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and
severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance Indexes
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat. you. and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
16
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to which is a safe distance from the road.
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the or repair facility for further inspection or re- risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- pairs. warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
30
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1
1 COMAND system, see sepa- 8 Storage compartment 281
rate operating instructions 9 Alarm system indicator 107
2 Climate control 204 lamp
3-zone automatic climate 218 a Electronic Stability Program 102
control* (ESP®) switch
Rear window defroster 203 b Adaptive damping system 255
3 Seat heating*, 130 (ADS)* switch
front passenger side c Seat ventilation*, 131
4 Seat ventilation*, 131 driver’s side
front passenger side d Seat heating*, driver’s side 130
5 Parktronic system* 259 e Switch for Downhill Speed 250
deactivation switch Regulation (DSR)
6 Vehicle level control 257 f Hazard warning flasher 141
switch* g Switch for Off-road driving 253
7 Front passenger front air 83, program
bag off indicator lamp 411, ML 63 AMG:
412 Program mode selector 194
switch for automatic trans-
mission
1
Depending on vehicle configuration.
31
At a glance
Center console
32
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Left reading lamp switch 142 b Front left reading lamp 142
2 Rear interior lighting switch 142 c Garage door opener 302
3 Automatic interior lighting 142 d Vehicles without 294
switch telephone* installed:
4 Front interior lighting switch 142 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
5 Right reading lamp switch 142 system)
6 Front right interior lamp 142 e Vehicles with telephone* 294
7 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240 installed:
switch Hands-free microphone for
8 Tele Aid (emergency call 297 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button system) and telephone*
9 Interior rear view mirror 199 f Front left interior lamp 142
33
At a glance
Storage compartments
34
At a glance
Storage compartments
35
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Inside door handle 118
2 Central unlocking switch 126
Central locking switch 126
3 Exterior rear view mirror 49
adjustment
4 Selection buttons for exteri- 49
or rear view mirror adjust-
ment
Power-folding exterior rear 200
view mirrors*
5 Switches for opening/clos- 235
ing front and rear door
windows
6 Rear door window override 96
switch
7 Remote tailgate release 121,
switch, power tailgate* 119
36
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
37
Getting started
Unlocking
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. Starter switch positions
All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock or unlock the vehicle without using
hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
Warning! G
the remote control buttons on the
system is disarmed. The locator light-
SmartKey and start the engine without in- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
serting the SmartKey into the starter SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
in the control system (컄 page 171).
switch. from the starter switch, take it with you and
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with i If the vehicle has been parked for more than lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the respective door. 왘 Enter the vehicle. access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
Warning! G KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 113).
39
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 400). ly charged.
3 Starting position 앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 489).
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head- 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 497).
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster completely discharged battery, always remove
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex- the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and engine is not in operation.
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go
Starter switch out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical con- i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
sumers, such as seat adjustment vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the start-
er switch. However, the ignition does not switch
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical on and the engine does not start.
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp i When the SmartKey is removed from the
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator starter switch and the automatic transmission is
lamps unless activated) in the instru- in a position other than P, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts to P.
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
40
Getting started
Unlocking
41
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0 Ignition (or Position 2) i When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board button twice. tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument
electronics have status 0 (as with cluster come on. The indicator and warning
This supplies power for all electrical
SmartKey removed). lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
consumers.
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
Position 1 All lamps (except high beam headlamp should go out when the engine is running. This
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator indicates that the respective systems are
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop operational.
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
button once. ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the For information on starting the engine
This supplies power for some electrical instrument cluster fails to come on using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
consumers, such as seat adjustment. when the ignition is switched on, have see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
it checked and replaced if necessary. If (컄 page 55).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
start/stop button For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see
mains on after starting the engine or
앫 once more, the ignition (position 2) is “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*”
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
switched on
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 400). (컄 page 113).
앫 twice more, the power supply is again
switched off i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once more, the power supply
is again switched off.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Seats
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can Warning! G
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 51).
Observe the following points: When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
G
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning! 앫 Adjust the backrest until your arms are
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
slightly angled when holding the steer-
lock the vehicle.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. ing wheel
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause 앫 Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. position that still allows you to reach the with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po- starter switch or the SmartKey with
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
sition should be as far back as possible KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
backrest in an excessively reclined position
with the driver still able to operate the the power seats can be operated.
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
controls properly.
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide Therefore, do not leave children unattended
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- 앫 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
close to the head as possible and the vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
center of the head restraint supports the vehicle could result in an accident and/or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
back of the head at eye level.
belts provide the best restraint when the serious personal injury.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment ! When moving the seats, make sure there are
Warning! G The seat adjustment switch is located on no items in the footwell or behind the seats;
otherwise you could damage the seats.
According to accident statistics, children the entry side of each front seat base.
are safer when properly restrained in the ! When the rear seats are folded forward, e.g.
for cargo compartment expansion (컄 page 269),
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
the front seats may not be moved to the rear-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend most position. Otherwise you could damage the
that children be placed in the rear seats front and rear seats.
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under ! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
must be seated and properly secured in an head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is
folded up (컄 page 201). If the head restraint is in
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
the uppermost position, it could hit and damage
restraint, or booster seat recommended for the sun visor.
the size and weight of the child. For addi-
tional information, see “Children in the vehi- 1 Head restraint height (vehicles with i Vehicles without memory function*:
cle” (컄 page 89). memory function)* The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes after
2 Seat cushion tilt either front door has been opened. The counter
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is resets each time
3 Seat height
significantly increased if the child restraints 앫
4 Backrest tilt you open or close a front door
are not properly secured in the vehicle
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment 앫 you insert the SmartKey into the starter
and/or the child is not properly secured in
switch
the child restraint.
앫 you remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
앫 you switch the ignition on or off
44
Getting started
Adjusting
i The memory function* (컄 page 133) lets Head restraint height ! Do not attempt to remove front seat head
you store the settings for the seat positions restraints. They can only be removed by qualified
together with the settings for the steering wheel
and the exterior rear view mirrors. Warning! G technicians. We recommend that you have this
work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Seat fore and aft adjustment Vehicles with memory function*:
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
왘 Press the switch forward or backward ed to help reduce injuries during an 왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 44) up or
in direction of arrow 5. accident. down in direction of arrow.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to Vehicles without memory function*:
Seat height
move the respective head restraint up from
왘 Press the switch up or down in the lowest non-use position and have the
direction of arrow 3. occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
Seat cushion tilt positioned and engaged head restraints.
왘 Press the switch up or down in Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
direction of arrow 2 until your upper close to the head as possible and the center
legs are lightly supported. of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
Seat backrest tilt tential for injury to the head and neck in the
1 Head restraint
왘 Press the switch forward or backward event of an accident or similar situation.
2 Release button
in direction of arrow 4.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
46
Getting started
Adjusting
47
Getting started
Adjusting
48
Getting started
Adjusting
49
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the driver’s i If you do not make adjustments to the ! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view
door. selected exterior rear view mirror within mirrors*:
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
then have to select the desired exterior rear view pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
mirror again before any adjustments can be pushed rearward (hit from the front), press fold
made. Adjustments can only be made with the button 1 (컄 page 201) to fold mirrors in, then
indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear press fold button 1 (컄 page 201) again to fold
view mirror button illuminated. mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man-
setting. ner.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly i The memory function* (컄 page 133) lets
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
you store the settings for the exterior rear view
button pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
mirrors together with the setting for the steering
2 Adjustment button it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
wheel and the seat positions.
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- place. The mirror housing is then properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
ror button manner. rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side ex- rors” (컄 page 199).
terior rear view mirror or button 3 for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
The indicator lamp on the respective
button comes on for
approximately 15 seconds.
50
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Fastening the seat belts seat belt. The air bags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle
Warning! G (컄 page 84). and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained.
51
Getting started
Driving
Warning! G Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Never let more people ride in the vehicle
backrest in an excessively reclined position than there are seat belts available. Make
as this can be dangerous. You could slide sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or son at a time.
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as Warning! G
possible and the belt is properly positioned
on the body. Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 76) and (컄 page 84).
52
Getting started
Driving
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt out 왘 Press release button 1 and move the 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
of seat belt outlet 1. seat belt height adjuster upward or person at a time.
downward.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a
across the top of your shoulder and the person and another object at the same
Proper use of seat belts
lap portion across your hips. time. When using a seat belt to secure
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening. infant or toddler restraints or children
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3
in booster seats, always follow the
(컄 page 52) until it clicks. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
portion is located as close as possible
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
to the middle of the shoulder (it should 앫 Check your seat belt periodically
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
not touch the neck). Never pass the during travel to make sure that it is
up.
shoulder portion of the belt under your properly positioned.
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust
Seat belt height adjustment 앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
the height of the belt outlet
snugly. Take special care of this when
(컄 page 53).
wearing loose clothing.
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a position
that is as upright as possible.
1 Release button
53
Getting started
Driving
54
Getting started
Driving
55
Getting started
Driving
왘 Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop The engine starts if the SmartKey with The engine preglows and starts if the
button 1 is inserted in the starter KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
switch (컄 page 41). vehicle.
i If you wish to start the engine using the i If the engine is at operating temperature,
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced.
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from
the starter switch (컄 page 41).
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 67).
56
Getting started
Driving
57
Getting started
Driving
58
Getting started
Driving
59
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals The combination switch resets automati- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
cally after major steering wheel move-
The combination switch is located on the ment. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
left of the steering column.
i To signal minor directional changes such as a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
changing lanes, press combination switch only damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
to point of resistance and release. The corre- a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
sponding turn signal will flash three times. windshield wipers in dry weather conditions,
always operate the windshield wipers with
windshield washer fluid (컄 page 62).
Windshield wipers
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
left of the steering column. ly.
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and
Combination switch 앫 remove SmartKey from starter switch
1 Turn signals, right or
2 Turn signals, left
앫 turn off the engine by pressing the
왘 Press the combination switch in KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
direction of arrow 1 or 2. open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in
The corresponding turn signal indicator position 0, same as with SmartKey
lamp L or K in the instrument removed from starter switch)
cluster flashes (컄 page 26). Combination switch before attempting to remove any blockage.
1 Single wipe 앫 Remove blockage.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
60
Getting started
Driving
If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the Intermittent wiping After the initial wipe, pauses between
combination switch position U or V, wipes are automatically controlled by the
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
앫 set the combination switch to the next rain sensor.
wet weather conditions or in the presence
higher wiper speed
of precipitation. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light When you select intermittent wiping, the
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
Truck Center rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor of the vehicle from being sprayed.
automatically sets a suitable wiping
Switching on windshield wipers Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
interval depending on the wetness of the
doors are closed and
왘 Turn the combination switch to the sensor surface.
앫 the automatic transmission is set to
desired position depending on the ! Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter- position D or R
intensity of the rain. mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an or
automatic car wash or during windshield clean-
M Windshield wipers off 앫 the wiper setting is changed using the
ing. Wipers will operate in the presence of water
U Slow intermittent wiping sprayed on the windshield, and windshield combination switch
Rain sensor operation with low wipers may be damaged as a result.
sensitivity. Single wipe
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
V Fast intermittent wiping the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects 왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
Rain sensor operation with high may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
undesired fashion. This could then damage the point.
sensitivity.
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
u Slow continuous wiping You should therefore switch off the windshield The windshield wipers wipe one time
wipers when weather conditions are dry. without washer fluid.
t Fast continuous wiping
왘 Turn the combination switch to
position U or V.
61
Getting started
Driving
62
Getting started
Driving
Deactivating intermittent wipe Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
position 4 (컄 page 62). The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
Indicator 6 (컄 page 62) for the rear 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged
window wiper is cleared from the lower (gasoline engine only). 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
multifunction display, indicating that soon as possible and turn off the en-
앫 The engine electronics may not be
the rear window wiper is deactivated. gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool
operating properly.
off.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
the catalytic converter and damaged it
왘 Turn and hold rear window wiper ant if necessary (컄 page 345).
(gasoline engine only).
switch 1 in position 2 or 5
(컄 page 62) until the rear window is 왘 Give very little gas.
clean. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an
The rear window wiper operates with authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
washer fluid. Center as soon as possible.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 346).
63
Getting started
Driving
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘 Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫 major assemblies
앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
64
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or dam-
You have properly stopped and parked
age to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
vehicle movement, before turning off the en-
gine and leaving the vehicle always:
Warning! G
Warning! G 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
With the engine not running, there is no
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
power assistance for the brake and the 앫 Shift the automatic transmission to
position P. and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi-
steering system. In this case, it is important
cle’s brake lights do not light up when the
to keep in mind that a considerably higher 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
parking brake is engaged.
degree of effort is necessary to brake and 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
steer the vehicle. wheel towards the road curb.
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
Warning! G from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- KEYLESS-GO*).
bustible materials such as grass, hay or 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
leaves can come into contact with the hot KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
exhaust system, as these materials could be leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
65
Getting started
Parking and locking
66
Getting started
Parking and locking
! Observe instructions when taking the Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* If you have started the engine with the
vehicle through an automatic conveyor type KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and can-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
car wash (컄 page 392). not turn it off as described above:
button (컄 page 41) to turn off the
engine. 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Turning off with the SmartKey
button from the starter switch.
With the driver’s door closed, the start-
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
er switch is now in position 1. With the 왘 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
to position 0 (컄 page 39).
driver’s door opened, the starter switch into the starter switch.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
The engine turns off. The starter switch
switch. removed from starter switch
is in position 0 (컄 page 39).
The immobilizer is activated. (컄 page 39).
! If you turn off the engine using the i In an emergency you can turn off the engine
SmartKey and while driving by pressing and holding the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter approximately 3 seconds.
switch
or ! If you turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a front
앫 open a front door door, the automatic transmission will shift to
the automatic transmission will shift to park park position P automatically.
position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine using
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone only
SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the will automatically shift the automatic transmis-
automatic transmission to neutral position N. sion to neutral position N.
67
Getting started
Parking and locking
Releasing seat belts Locking i The exterior lamps switch off automatically
when you remove the SmartKey from the starter
왘 Press the seat belt release button switch or open the driver’s door.
(컄 page 52). Warning! G When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are
Allow the retractor to completely re- switched on and you remove the SmartKey from
To prevent possible personal injury, always the starter switch and open the driver’s door, an
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
keep hands and fingers away from the door acoustic signal sounds.
plate.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- In addition the message Switch Off Lights
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that cially careful when small children are appears in the multifunction display.
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get around. Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat lamp.
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and Before closing doors, make sure there is no
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or possibility of someone getting caught in a ! Failure to switch off the parking lamps or the
cause damage to the door and/or door trim door during closing. rear fog lamp when leaving the vehicle may
panel. Such damage is not covered by the result in a discharged battery.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact Warning! G the tailgate.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
68
Getting started
Parking and locking
69
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint systems the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 Front passenger front air bag off
of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
indicator lamp (컄 page 83)
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The restraint systems are
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 84) Classification System (OCS) cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when the
(컄 page 79) ignition is switched on and goes out no
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 94)
Although independent systems, their later than a few seconds after the engine
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
protective functions work in conjunction was started.
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 93)
with each other. The SRS components are in operational
Additional protection potential provide readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
i For information on infants and children
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint lit when the engine is running.
with systems for infants and children, see “Children A malfunction in the system has been
in the vehicle” (컄 page 89).
앫 Air bags (컄 page 74) detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash 앫 fails to go out not later than approxi-
sensors) mately 4 seconds after the engine was
started
앫 Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 87) 앫 does not come on at all
앫 Seat belt force limiter (컄 page 87) 앫 comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 88)
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-
ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
eration of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal properly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina-
impact air bags and window curtain air bags) For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
or rollovers (window curtain air bags). steering wheel. If you have any
collision always be in normal seated position
However, no system available today can problems, please see an authorized
with your back against the seat backrest.
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to
The deployment of the air bags temporarily properly positioned on your body
the steering wheel or dashboard.
releases a small amount of dust from the air (컄 page 51).
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
speed and force, a proper seating and hands side the rim can increase the risk and
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- on steering wheel position will help to keep potential severity of hand/arm injury
porary breathing difficulty for people with you at a safe distance from the air bag. when driver’s front air bag inflates.
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
or too close to the air bag can be seriously possible rearward from the dashboard
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates when the seat is occupied.
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the with great force in the blink of an eye:
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
앫 Sit properly belted in a position that is as
fresh air by opening a window or door.
upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
Warning! G designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
Only use seat covers which have been based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers On the front passenger-side, the front air bag
may interfere with or prevent the deployment is additionally influenced by the
deployment of the front side impact air bags passenger’s weight category as identified by the
or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 79).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for availability. The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
1 Driver air bag for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly 2 Passenger air bag
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
Driver and front passenger front air bags
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
are deployed:
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual. 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫 independently of the side impact air
bags
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The air bags will not deploy in impacts Side impact air bags, window curtain
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- air bags
ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
ted by the fastened seat belts.
Warning! G
The front passenger front air bag will only
be deployed if: The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
앫 the system senses that the front
modify any components of the doors or door
passenger seat is occupied
trim panels including, for example, the addi-
앫 the 59 indicator lamp in tion of door speakers.
the center console is not lit 1 Front side impact air bag
Improper repair work on the doors or the
(컄 page 83) 2 Window curtain air bag
modification or addition of components to
3 Rear side impact air bag*
앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy- the doors create a risk of rendering the
ment threshold side impact air bags inoperative or causing The side impact air bags and window
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the curtain air bags are deployed:
doors must therefore only be performed by 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫 independently of the front air bags
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The side impact air bags and window cur- Occupant Classification System Furthermore, the occupant weight may
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts appear to increase or decrease due to
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- The Occupant Classification System (OCS) objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
ment threshold. automatically turns the front passenger gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
front air bag on or off based on the classi- underneath the seat or stuffed between
The front passenger side impact air bag
fied occupant weight category determined seat and middle console or between seat
will not deploy if the OCS senses that the
by weight sensor readings from the front and door or due to objects applying pres-
front passenger seat is empty and the front
passenger seat. sure on the back of the seat. Always make
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
sure that the seat has clearance in all
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With i The system does not deactivate the front directions at all times.
an empty front passenger seat and the passenger side impact air bag, the window
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in- curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning
device.
i If your seat, including your trim cover and
serted into buckle) the front passenger cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
side impact air bag will deploy indepen- Occupants must sit properly belted in a the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
dently of the empty seat. position that is as upright as possible with Light Truck Center.
their back against the seat backrest and Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Warning! G feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to Both, driver and the front passenger
Only use seat covers which have been test- another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean- should always use the
ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able 59 indicator lamp as an indi-
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may to properly approximate the occupant’s cation of whether or not the front passen-
interfere with or prevent the deployment of weight category. ger is properly positioned.
the front side impact air bags or the rear
side impact air bags*. Contact your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
availability.
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt seat belt force limiter
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
telltale < will always illuminate The seat belts for the front seats and rear
warning chime sounds with increasing
for 6 seconds to remind you and your outer seats are equipped with emergency
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
passengers to fasten your seat belts. tensioning devices and seat belt force
or until the driver’s and the front limiters.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened passenger’s seat belt are fastened
when the engine is started, an additional The ETD is designed to activate in the
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
warning chime will also sound for a maxi- following cases:
seat belt remains unfastened after
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s
60 seconds, the warning chime stops 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
seat belt is fastened.
sounding, the seat belt telltale < exceeding the system deployment
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the stops flashing but continues to be illu- threshold
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front minated. 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
with front doors closed, The seat belt telltale < will only go out 앫 if the restraint systems are operational
if both the driver’s and the front passen- and functioning correctly, see
앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu- ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 410)
minated for as long as either the driv- seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not is standing still and a front door is opened. i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
fastened vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened
For more information, see “Practical hints” (latch plate properly inserted into buckle).
(컄 page 406). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
You cannot remove the active head Rear head restraints Children in the vehicle
restraint on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats. If an infant or child is traveling with you in
For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G the vehicle:
we recommend that you contact an 왘 Secure the child using an infant or child
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
restraint appropriate to the age and
Center. head restraints installed when the rear seats
size of the child.
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
For information on head restraint adjust- 왘 Make sure the infant or child is
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43). properly secured at all times while the
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
For information on resetting the activated vehicle is in motion.
move the respective head restraint up from
active head restraints, see “Resetting acti- the lowest non-use position and have the
vated head restraints” (컄 page 458). occupant adjust the head restraint properly. Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
Do not leave children unattended in the
positioned head restraints.
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child re-
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that straint system. The children could
it is as close to the head as possible and the
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for 앫 be seriously or fatally injured through
injury to the head and neck in the event of excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold 컄컄
an accident or similar situation.
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
90
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child 앫 If you have to place a child in a
the front passenger seat will be serious- restraint on the front passenger seat be- forward-facing child restraint on the
ly injured or even killed if the front cause circumstances require you to do front passenger seat, move the seat as
passenger front air bag inflates in a so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
collision which could occur under some 59 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
circumstances, even with the air bag nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and se-
technology installed in your vehicle. The ger front air bag is deactivated. Should cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
only means to completely eliminate this the 59 indicator lamp not seat belt according to the child seat
risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac- illuminate or go out while the restraint is manufacturer’s instructions. For
ing child restraint in the front seat. We installed, please check installation. children larger than the typical
therefore strongly recommend that you Periodically check the 12-month-old child, the front passenger
always place a child in a rear-facing child 59 indicator lamp while front air bag may or may not be
restraint in the back seat. driving to make sure the lamp is illumi- activated (컄 page 80).
nated. If the 59 indicator
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the front passenger Warning! G
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on Infants and small children should never
the front passenger seat will be serious-
share a seat belt with another occupant.
ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
During an accident, they could be crushed
senger front air bag inflates.
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from Installation of infant and child restraint
the seat on which a child seat is to be system
installed.
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each
of the rear seating positions.
2 Anchorage ring
3 Hook
94
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Move the respective head restraint to 왘 Securely fasten hook 3, which is part
its uppermost position (컄 page 128). of the tether strap 4, to anchorage Warning! G
ring 2.
After installing top tether straps, make sure
Make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright po-
앫 the top tether strap is not twisted sition and are properly locked. Check for
secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
앫 the head restraint is installed and
seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not
positioned such that the top tether
properly locked, the seat backrest could
strap can pass freely between the
fold. The child seat would no longer be prop-
head restraint and top of seat back-
erly supported or positioned to provide its
rest
intended benefit.
앫 top tether strap is positioned be-
2 Anchorage ring
tween the seat backrest and the
3 Hook 왘 Lower the head restraint if necessary
cargo compartment cover blind (if
4 Top tether strap (컄 page 128).
installed)
왘 Guide top tether strap 4 between Make sure the top tether strap can
앫 the top tether strap is positioned
head restraint and top of seat backrest. pass freely between the head restraint
between the seat backrest and the and top of seat backrest.
cargo net* (if installed)
왘 Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.
95
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation The override switch is located on the Disabling
driver’s door control panel.
왘 Press override switch 1 until it engag-
With the override switch you can disable
es.
the rear side window switches in the rear
door panels. The switch engages in the recessed
position.
Warning! G The rear door windows can no longer
be operated using the switches located
Activate the override switch when children in the rear doors.
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children could otherwise injure them-
i Operating the rear door windows using the
switches located on the door control panel of the
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- driver’s door is still possible.
dow opening. 1 Override switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the For more information on power windows, Enabling
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see “Power windows” (컄 page 235).
왘 Press override switch 1 once more.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- The switch disengages from its
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an recessed position back to its original
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised position.
access to a vehicle could result in an The rear door windows can again be
accident and/or serious personal injury. operated using the switches located in
the rear doors.
96
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
i Canada only: Deactivating
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following 왘 Press button 1 again.
two conditions:
or
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
왘 Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
cause undesired operation of the device. switch.
Any unauthorized modification to this device or
could void the user’s authority to operate the
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
1 Â button equipment.
button (컄 page 41).
i USA only: Activating The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following be in the vehicle.
왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
two conditions:
1 second.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and An audible alarm and flashing exterior
(2) this device must accept any interference lamps will operate briefly.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
97
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
98
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
99
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS ESP®
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run-
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning. It monitors the vehicle’s traction
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the
tially reducing braking distance. afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling.
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
until the emergency braking situation is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
over. applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
The ABS will prevent the wheels from and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
locking. works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
especially useful while driving off and on
When you release the brake pedal, the capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
brakes function again as normal. The BAS never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
also helps stabilize the vehicle during
is then deactivated. ous manner which could jeopardize the
braking and steering maneuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
Warning! G ment cluster (컄 page 26) flashes when the
ESP® is engaged.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning, but without the addi- The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
tional brake boost available that BAS would ment cluster comes on when you switch on
normally provide in an emergency braking the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance running.
may increase.
100
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
101
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP® i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
Warning! G more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
Warning! G Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore- flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
mentioned circumstances do not apply any- stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize The ESP® switch is located on the upper
normal driving other than in the circum-
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a part of the center console.
stances described below. Disabling of the
wheel is spinning.
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers.
When you switch off the ESP®
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted. 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫 the engine output is not limited, which
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch allows the drive wheels to spin and
off the ESP® in driving situations where it thus cut into surfaces for better grip
would be advantageous to have the drive 앫 the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for spinning wheel
better grip such as: 1 ESP® switch
앫 the ESP® continues to operate when
앫 when driving with snow chains 왘 With the engine running, press ESP®
you are braking
앫 in deep snow switch 1.
앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
앫 in sand or gravel The ESP® warning lamp v in the
앫 the cruise control switch off if currently
instrument cluster comes on.
activated
The ESP® is deactivated.
102
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
For more information, see “Practical hints” The ESP® Trailer Stabilization is functional
Warning! G (컄 page 399). at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h) when the ESP® is
When the ESP® warning lamp v is Off-road – ESP® switched on.
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a With the off-road driving program switched
malfunction. on (컄 page 253), the ESP® designed for Warning G
off-road use is automatically activated. At
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the The system will not be able to assist when
ing road conditions and to the non-operating ESP® assists in over-/understeering, thus the trailer jackknifes
status of the ESP®. improving vehicle traction. 앫 on wet or icy roads
앫 on roads with slippery surface
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex- ESP® Trailer Stabilization
tended period of time with the ESP® switched 앫 in sand or gravel
If the trailer you are towing should begin to
off. This may cause serious damage to the Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
drivetrain which is not covered by the sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
over before the system recognizes swaying
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. immediately applying the brakes hard.
of the trailer.
Steering during this maneuver will not help
Switching on the ESP® to stabilize the rig.
ESP® will assist you in such situations. i If the ESP® has switched off due to a mal-
왘 Press ESP® switch 1. function, ESP® cannot stabilize the rig.
ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts
The ESP® warning lamp v in the swaying and will apply the brakes to re-
instrument cluster goes out. duce the vehicle speed to a non-critical
You are now again in normal driving speed that allows the vehicle-trailer combi-
mode. nation to stabilize.
103
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
EBP 4-ETS
Warning! G
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize When you see ESP® warning lamp v
greater proportion of the braking effort available traction, especially under flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro-
without a loss of vehicle stability. slippery road conditions. The brakes are ceed as follows:
applied to the spinning wheel and power is 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
Warning! G transferred to the wheel(s) with traction. as possible.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys- ment cluster, starts to flash at any vehicle tor.
tem is still functioning. However, the rear speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
wheels may lock during hard braking, caus- the wheel begins to spin. the prevailing road conditions.
ing you to lose control over the vehicle and Failure to observe these guidelines could
possibly causing an accident. Adjust your i If conditions require, switch on off-road
driving program (컄 page 253). cause the vehicle to skid.
driving style to the non-operating status of
the EBP. The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-
ting from excessive speed.
104
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
! Operational or performance test must only i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized switched off temporarily to prevent overheating
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or message ESP Unavailable See Operator’s
the transfer case which is not covered by the Manual appears in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For more information, see the “Practical
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, hints” section (컄 page 400) and
the engine and ignition must be shut off (컄 page 413).
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in Off-road - 4-ETS
position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake
on a brake test dynamometer and such testing With the off-road driving program switched
should be no longer than 10 seconds. on (컄 page 253), the 4-ETS designed for
Active braking action through the ESP® may off-road use is automatically activated.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
105
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
106
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three Canceling the alarm
times, one of the following elements may not be
The alarm system indicator lamp is located To cancel the alarm:
properly closed:
to the lower left of the hazard warning
flasher. 앫 a door With the SmartKey
앫 the tailgate
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
Close the respective element and lock the switch.
vehicle again.
or
Disarming the alarm system 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
왘 Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey SmartKey.
or with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 38).
With KEYLESS-GO*
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is 왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
1 Alarm system indicator lamp disarmed. Indicator lamp 1 goes out. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
i The alarm system will rearm automatically be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 68). again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a or
door nor the tailgate is opened.
The turn signal lamps flash three times 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
to indicate that the vehicle is locked. button (컄 page 41).
The alarm system is armed within ap- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
proximately 10 seconds. Alarm system be inside the vehicle.
indicator lamp 1 flashes.
107
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Transfer case
Good visibility
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper- locking, see the “Getting started” section
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. (컄 page 38) and (컄 page 68).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will SmartKey
be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
SmartKey with remote control
given at the beginning of each segment. ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when 1 ‹ Lock button
you are in close proximity to it. 2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
4 Œ Unlock button
앫 the doors 5 Battery check lamp
앫 the tailgate 6 Â Panic button (컄 page 97)
110
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Press button ‹.
Global unlocking
왘 Press button Œ once.
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
왘 Press button Œ.
the turn signal lamps flash three times. All turn signal lamps flash once. The
All turn signal lamps flash once. The The locking knobs in the doors move locking knob in the driver’s door moves
locking knobs in the doors move up. down. The anti-theft alarm system is up. The anti-theft alarm system is
The anti-theft alarm system is armed. disarmed.
disarmed.
Selective setting Global unlocking
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press button Œ twice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un- to reprogram the SmartKey so that
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking if pressing button Œ only unlocks the
locking knobs in the doors move up.
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
앫 neither door nor tailgate is opened The anti-theft alarm system is
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ disarmed.
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
starter switch
until battery check lamp 5
앫 the central locking switch is not (컄 page 110) flashes twice.
activated
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
112
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO* 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be positioned farther away from the vehi-
앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
located outside the vehicle within ap- cle, the system may no longer recog-
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
(컄 page 110).
door or the tailgate. The vehicle then cannot be locked or
The starter switch is located under the the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
앫 If the vehicle has been parked for more
KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the system.
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
KEYLESS-GO button out in order to ac-
door handle in order to activate the 앫 If you have started the engine with the
cess the starter switch (컄 page 41).
KEYLESS-GO function. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func- (컄 page 55), you can turn it off again by
앫 In order to start the engine with the
tions with normal SmartKey functions
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: 앫 pressing the KEYLESS-GO
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
start/stop button (컄 page 67)
locking with the ‹ button). 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle. 앫 inserting the SmartKey into the
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
starter switch when the vehicle is at
KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
a standstill and the automatic
must be inserted in the starter
앫 Never store the SmartKey with transmission is in position P
switch (컄 page 41).
KEYLESS-GO together with: (컄 page 67)
앫 The brake pedal must be firmly
앫 electronic items such as a cellular
depressed. Do not depress the
phone or another SmartKey with
accelerator.
KEYLESS-GO
앫 metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is 앫 Remember that the engine can be Factory setting
removed from the vehicle (e.g. if a started by anyone with a SmartKey
passenger exits the vehicle with the with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the Global unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO) vehicle.
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
Possibility 1 (One SmartKey with
앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one All turn signal lamps flash once. The
start/stop button or trying to lock
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside locking knobs in the doors move up.
the vehicle with the look button on
the vehicle): The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
an outside door handle the mes-
If you leave the SmartKey with armed.
sage Key Not Detected appears in
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and The vehicle will lock again automatically
the multifunction display
locking the vehicle, no message and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
앫 with the engine running, the mes- appears in the multifunction display. within approximately 40 seconds of
sage Key Not Detected appears in Possibility 2 (One SmartKey with unlocking if
the multifunction display while KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
driving off. 앫 neither a door nor the tailgate is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle): opened
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediate- When exiting and trying to lock the 앫 the central locking switch is not
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger vehicle, the message Key Detected In activated
seat or insert it in shirt pocket). Vehicle will appear in the multifunction
display. The vehicle will not be locked. i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the vehicle and
앫 an outside door handle is splashed with
water
or
앫 you attempt to clean an outside door handle
116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler Global locking
flap
왘 Press the lock button on an outside 왘 Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 69). 왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door handle. door handle (컄 page 69).
With the tailgate and all doors closed, All turn signal lamps flash once. The All turn signal lamps flash three times.
the turn signal lamps flash three times. locking knob in the driver’s door moves The locking knobs in the doors move
The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis- down. The anti-theft alarm system is
down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. armed.
armed.
Global unlocking Restoring to factory setting
Selective setting
왘 Grasp any outside door handle other 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish than the driver’s outside door handle. simultaneously for about 5 seconds
to reprogram the SmartKey with
All turn signal lamps flash once. The until battery check lamp 5
KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the (컄 page 113) flashes twice.
locking knobs in the doors move up.
driver’s door handle only the driver’s door
The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
armed.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 113) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries in the SmartKey Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with Opening the doors from the inside
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*
You can open a locked door from the in-
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with side. Open door only when conditions are
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you safe to do so.
The battery check lamp (컄 page 110)
should do the following:
or (컄 page 113) comes on briefly to in-
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an
order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
i If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey,
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the me-
Replace the batteries (컄 page 461). chanical key immediately to your car
You can obtain the required batteries at any insurance company.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if 1 Locking knob
necessary. 2 Inside door handle
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the Center will be glad to supply you with a re-
vehicle accordingly.
placement.
118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i If the vehicle has previously been locked Front doors Tailgate/Power tailgate*
from the outside with the SmartKey or with
왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. respective front door to open door.
Warning! G
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: If the door was locked, locking knob 1
With the SmartKey will move up. Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Rear doors other dangers deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
SmartKey. 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
unconsciousness and death.
tive rear door to unlock door.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫 Grasp an outside door handle. 왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re-
A minimum height clearance of 7.0 ft
spective rear door to open door.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (2.13 m) is required to open the tailgate.
(컄 page 41).
Vehicles with vehicle level control*:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be Depending on the set vehicle level a mini-
inside the vehicle.
mum height clearance of 7.2 ft (2.20 m) is
required to open the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
120
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Power tailgate* Opening the tailgate from the outside Opening the tailgate from the inside
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can You can unlock and open the tailgate You can unlock and open the tailgate si-
simultaneously from the outside when the multaneously from the driver’s seat when
앫 open and close the tailgate from the
vehicle is at a standstill. the vehicle is at a standstill.
inside and the outside electrically
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
앫 limit the opening height of the tailgate
SmartKey or SmartKey with Warning! G
앫 interrupt the opening/closing proce- KEYLESS-GO* until the tailgate unlocks
dure at any time by and opens. Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
앫 pressing or pulling the the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
While the tailgate is opening, an
door-mounted remote tailgate the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or
acoustic signal sounds.
switch (컄 page 122) with the Š button on the SmartKey or
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the
앫 pressing the Š button on the opening procedure carefully to make sure
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
SmartKey (컄 page 110) or no one is in danger of being injured.
Pull on the handle (컄 page 120).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
(컄 page 113) The tailgate is unlocked and opens.
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
While the tailgate is opening, an acous-
앫 pressing the tailgate closing switch switch or press the Š button on the
tic signal sounds.
(컄 page 123) SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
앫 pressing the tailgate
closing/locking switch (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO*) (컄 page 123)
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The switch is located in the driver’s door. Limiting opening height of tailgate*
In vehicles with power tailgate*, the tail-
Warning! G
gate opening height can be limited when Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
transporting goods on a roof rack* (e.g. the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
presence of an MB roof cargo container*). the door-mounted switch. Monitor the
When activated, the tailgate opens to closing procedure carefully to make sure no
approximately 6.6 ft (2.00 m). one is in danger of being injured.
왘 Activate the limiting opening height of To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
tailgate using the control system pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
(컄 page 176). switch or press the Š button on the
1 Remote tailgate switch SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Closing the tailgate from the inside
왘 Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
tailgate begins to open. You can close the tailgate from the inside with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
using the remote tailgate switch. starter switch or the SmartKey with
The tailgate opens. While the tailgate is
If the tailgate comes into contact with an KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
opening, an acoustic signal sounds.
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has the remote tailgate switch can be operated.
been piled too high) the closing procedure Therefore, do not leave children unattended
is stopped and the tailgate reopens. in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
122
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘 Press remote tailgate switch 1 Closing the tailgate from the outside
(컄 page 122) until tailgate begins to You can close the tailgate from the outside
close. using the tailgate closing switch or
The tailgate closes. While the tailgate is the Š button on the SmartKey or
closing an acoustic signal sounds. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. In vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO*, you can also simulta-
To interrupt the closing procedure:
neously lock the vehicle.
왘 Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
(컄 page 122).
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) the closing procedure Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
1 Tailgate closing switch
왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 or the
Š button on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* briefly.
The tailgate closes and an acoustic
warning sounds.
Warning! G
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO* Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
1 Tailgate closing switch jured. To prevent possible personal injury, 컄컄
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
124
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
125
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the drivers Unlocking
door.
왘 Press central unlocking switch 1.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate from inside using the central lock- The vehicle unlocks.
ing or unlocking switch. This can be useful,
for example, if you want to lock the vehicle
i You can open a locked door from inside at
any time. Open door only when conditions are
before starting to drive. safe to do so.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un- If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
locked with the central locking or unlock- with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
ing switch. not unlock using the central unlocking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
G
central locking switch:
Warning! 1 Central unlocking switch 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
2 Central locking switch KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
complete vehicle is unlocked when a front
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* door is opened from the inside
Locking
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
왘 Press central locking switch 2. 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an If all doors and the tailgate are closed, only the front door opened from the inside is
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised the vehicle locks. unlocked
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury. i With the passenger-side door opened, you
cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking
switch.
126
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see You cannot remove the active head Rear seat head restraints
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 43). restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat.
For more information on seats, see “Load-
ing” (컄 page 266).
For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Front seat active head restraints
Center. head restraints installed when the rear seats
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
For information on head restraint adjust-
Warning! G ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
For information on active head restraints, With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
For your protection, drive only with properly see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 88). move the respective head restraint up from
positioned head restraints. the lowest non-use position and have the oc-
cupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is close
to the head as possible and the center of the For your protection, drive only with properly
head restraint supports the back of the head positioned head restraints.
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
injury to the head and neck in the event of it is as close to the head as possible and the
an accident or similar situation. center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will re-
duce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
127
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint height Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Head restraints, removing and install-
ing
128
Controls in detail
Seats
1 Adjustment lever
왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction
of arrows until you have reached a
1 Seat cushion depth
comfortable seating position.
2 Backrest side bolsters
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest bottom
129
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Seat heating* The switches for rear seat heating are
located in the rear center console.
Seat cushion depth The switches for front-seat heating are lo-
cated in the center console.
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg with
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘 Adjust the contour of the seat backrest
to the desired position with
switch æ or ç.
왘 Move the backrest support to the bot- 1 Seat heating switch, rear seats
tom with button 4 or to the center 2 Indicator lamps
with button 3. 1 Seat heating switch, front seats
2 Indicator lamps
Backrest side bolsters
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.
130
Controls in detail
Seats
The red indicator lamps in the switch come 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Seat ventilation*
on to show which heating level you have
selected. Switching on The switches for the seat ventilation are
located in the center console.
왘 Press switch 1.
Level
Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
3 Three indicator lamps on
switch come on.
(highest level)
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 2 after approx- desired seat heating level is reached.
imately 5 minutes.
Switching off
2 Two indicator lamps on
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
The seat heating automatically indicator lamps 2 go out.
switches to level 1 after approx-
imately 10 minutes. i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on 1 Seat ventilation switch, front seats
seat heating switch 1 (컄 page 130) are flash- 2 Indicator lamps
1 One indicator lamp on ing, there is insufficient voltage available since
(lowest level) too many electrical consumers are switched on.
The seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately The seat heating will switch back on again
20 minutes. automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
off No indicator lamp on
131
Controls in detail
Seats
132
Controls in detail
Memory function*
왔 Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up The memory button and stored position
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different configurations. buttons are located on the entry side of
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- Each stored position on the driver’s side each front seat base.
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate includes the following settings:
control, reach and comfort. The head
restraint should also be adjusted for 앫 Seat position
proper height. See also the section on 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
air bags (컄 page 74) for proper seat posi- setting
tioning.
앫 Steering wheel position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors’ position
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior Each stored position on the passenger side
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for includes the following settings:
adequate rear vision. M Memory button
앫 Seat position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- 1, 2, 3 Stored position buttons
앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
dren should be seated in a properly se-
setting
cured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Warning! G
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
133
Controls in detail
Memory function*
왘 Adjust the seats (컄 page 43). ! Do not operate the power seats using
memory button M if the seat backrest is in an
왘 On the driver’s side, additionally adjust
excessively reclined position. Doing so could
the steering wheel (컄 page 48) and ex- cause damage to front or rear seats.
terior rear view mirrors (컄 page 49) to
Move seat backrest to an upright position first.
the desired positions.
왘 Press and hold stored position
왘 Press memory button M.
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
왘 Release memory button M and press wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within have fully moved to the stored posi-
3 seconds. tions.
All settings are stored to the selected i Releasing the stored position button stops
position. movement to the stored positions immediately.
134
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker
headlamps and use the turn signals, see lamps, tail lamps, license plate
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 59) lamps, instrument panel lamps)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 60).
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive beam headlamps
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have 7 ‡ Front fog lamps
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low 8 † Rear fog lamp
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. i The exterior lamps switch off automatically
when you remove the SmartKey from the starter
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
switch or open the driver’s door with the ignition
headlamps: switched off.
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the stops)
When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are
vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed, then 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left switched on and you remove the SmartKey from
automatically shift their beams to either side to one stop) the starter switch or open the driver’s door, an
better follow the curvature of the road ahead, acoustic signal sounds.
increasing usable illumination over conventional 3 M Off
headlamps. In addition the message Switch Off Lights
Daytime running lamp mode appears in the multifunction display.
(컄 page 137) Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp
4 U Automatic headlamp mode manually.
Daytime running lamp mode ! Failure to switch off the parking lamps when
(컄 page 137) leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
135
Controls in detail
Lighting
136
Controls in detail
Lighting
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to Daytime running lamp mode Canada only
position U. In Canada the daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in
With the SmartKey in starter switch is mandatory and therefore in a constant position M or U, you cannot switch on the
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* mode. high beam headlamps.
start/stop button pressed once, only The high beam flasher is available at all times.
In the USA the daytime running lamp mode
the parking lamps and the side marker For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
is deactivated by default. Activate the day-
lamps will switch on and off depending switch to position B to permit activation of
time running lamp mode using the control
on the brightness of the ambient light. the high beam headlamps.
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
When the engine is running, the low mode (USA only)” (컄 page 170). When the engine is running, and you shift
beam headlamps, the tail and parking from a driving position to position N or P
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the with the vehicle at a standstill, the low
position M or U.
side marker lamps will switch on and beam headlamps will switch off with a
off depending on the brightness of the When the engine is running, the low three-minute delay.
ambient light. beam headlamps are switched on.
When the engine is running, and you
i Canada only: In low ambient light conditions, the
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
High beam headlamps are only available with the following lamps will switch on
exterior lamp switch in position B. additionally: position C, the low beam head-
lamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
앫 Tail and parking lamps side marker lamps and the license
앫 License plate lamps plate lamps switch on
앫 Side marker lamps 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
i With the daytime running lamp mode mode has priority over the daytime
activated and the engine running, you cannot
running lamp mode
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
137
Controls in detail
Lighting
138
Controls in detail
Lighting
Front fog lamps Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C or B (컄 page 135). position B (컄 page 135).
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
stop. second stop.
The front fog lamps switch on. The rear fog lamp switches on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on. exterior lamp switch comes on.
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch. 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch off. 1 High beam
The rear fog lamp switches off. 2 High beam flasher
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out. The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out. High beam
The front fog lamps remain lit. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 135).
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 26). 컄컄
139
Controls in detail
Lighting
컄컄 왘 Pull the combination switch in direction Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* Driving forward
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im- Switching on corner-illuminating front
prove illumination of the area in the direc- fog lamps
The high beam headlamp indicator
tion into which you are turning.
lamp A in the instrument cluster 왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal
goes out. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will (컄 page 60), depending on whether
operate with the engine running and with you are turning left or right.
High beam flasher 앫 the exterior lamp switch in The respective front fog lamp comes on
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in position B (컄 page 135) and illuminates the area in the direc-
direction of arrow 2. or tion into which you are turning.
앫 the daytime running lamp mode The front fog lamp on the side of your
activated (컄 page 137) steering direction comes on.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle
if you turn the steering wheel in one direction
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph and then again in the other direction shortly
(40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched thereafter.
on, the corner-illuminating function is not avail-
able.
140
Controls in detail
Lighting
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will Driving in reverse Hazard warning flasher
come on automatically depending on the steer-
ing angle and vehicle speed, even if you did not Switching on corner-illuminating front The hazard warning flasher can be
switch on either turn signal. If the fog lamps switched on at all times, even with the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on SmartKey removed from the starter switch
automatically, they will also go out automatically 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
depending on the steering angle and vehicle reverse gear R (컄 page 185).
speed.
removed from the vehicle.
The front fog lamp opposite to your
The hazard warning flasher switches on
steering direction comes on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front automatically when an air bag deploys.
fog lamps
Switching off corner-illuminating front The hazard warning flasher switch is
The combination switch for the turn signal fog lamps located on the center console.
resets automatically after major steering
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to a
wheel movements. This will switch off the
gear other than reverse gear R
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
(컄 page 185).
were activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal. The respective corner-illuminating
front fog lamp goes out.
If the turn signal should stay on after
making the turn, the turn signal and the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be
switched off by returning the combination
switch to its original position.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
142
Controls in detail
Lighting
143
Controls in detail
Lighting
For better orientation in the dark, the The cargo compartment lamp comes on
corresponding door entry lamps comes on when the tailgate is opened.
when you open a door and the automatic
If you leave the tailgate open for an extend-
control is activated. ed period of time, the cargo compartment
The door entry lamps will switch off when lamp will switch off automatically after ap-
the corresponding door is closed. proximately 5 minutes.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
144
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument i Opening a front door or pressing the reset Adjusting instrument cluster illumina-
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” button without switching on the ignition or the tion
(컄 page 26). exterior lighting activates the multifunction
display illumination only for 30 seconds. Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumina-
For information on changing the instru- tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
ment cluster settings, e.g. the language, i The instrument cluster illumination is
see “Instrument cluster submenu” dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
(컄 page 167). bient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
Warning! G adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
No messages will be displayed if either the i With the exterior lighting switched on, the
instrument cluster or the multifunction brightness of the switches in the center console
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted when using button 1 or 3.
display is inoperative.
2 Reset button
3 To brighten instrument cluster As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such
To brighten illumination
illumination
as speed or outside temperature, warn- 왘 Press and hold button 3 until the
The instrument cluster is activated when ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning desired level of illumination is reached.
you messages or the failure of any systems.
앫 open a door Driving characteristics may be impaired. To dim illumination
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 40) If you must continue to drive, do so with 왘 Press and hold button 1 until the
added caution. Contact an authorized desired level of illumination is reached.
앫 press reset button 2
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
앫 switch on the exterior lamps as possible.
(컄 page 135)
145
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting trip odometer To help protect the engine, the fuel supply The temperature sensor is located in the
is interrupted if the engine is operated front bumper area. Due to its location, the
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome- within the red marking. sensor can be affected by road or engine
ter display (컄 page 147). heat during idling or slow driving. This
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è Outside temperature indicator means that the accuracy of the displayed
or ÿ on the multifunction steering temperature can only be verified by com-
wheel (컄 page 148) repeatedly until parison to a thermometer placed next to
the trip odometer appears in the multi- Warning! G the sensor, not by comparison to external
function display. displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
왘 Press and hold reset button 2 in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
instrument cluster (컄 page 145) until ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the trip odometer is reset. garage), you will notice a delay before the
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- lower temperature is displayed.
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
Tachometer A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
The red marking on the tachometer perature indications caused by heat
(컄 page 26) denotes excessive engine radiated from the engine during idling or
speed. The outside temperature is displayed in the slow driving.
multifunction display (컄 page 147).
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
146
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 (컄 page 40) or as
soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
ton* is in position 1 (컄 page 42). The con- conditions must always be his/her primary
trol system enables you to focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for maintenance service, to set the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
language for messages in the instrument (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
cluster display, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Transmission position indicator
ly 14 m) every second. 4 Current transmission program mode1
5 Status indicator (outside temperature
The control system relays information to or digital speedometer)
the multifunction display. For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 150).
1
AMG vehicles only.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
148
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- functions, you will find a number of pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. submenus for calling up and changing
settings. For instructions on using these
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
submenus, see “Settings menu”
repeatedly, you will pass through each
(컄 page 163).
menu one after the other.
The number of menus available in the sys-
앫 If you press button k or j
tem depends on which optional equipment
repeatedly, you will pass through each
is installed in your vehicle.
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 1 to 6. overview of the individual menus.
150
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are system and are not necessarily identical to those function displayed in each menu will automati-
designed to facilitate navigation within the shown in the control system displays. The first cally show you which part of the system you are
in.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 7 to b. overview of the individual menus.
152
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are system and are not necessarily identical to those function displayed in each menu will automati-
designed to facilitate navigation within the shown in the control system displays. The first cally show you which part of the system you are
in.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature
154
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or i You can select whether the digital speedom-
until the coolant temperature appears outside temperature eter or the outside temperature is shown in the
in the multifunction display. multifunction display.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly You can change the setting in the submenu
until the digital speedometer or the Instrument Cluster via the function Status
outside temperature appears in the Line Display, see “Selecting display (digital
multifunction display. speedometer or outside temperature) for status
indicator” (컄 page 168).
155
Controls in detail
Control system
1 Gear indicator
2 Engine oil temperature
i The engine oil temperature value flashes
if the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Saving lap time and starting a new lap Resetting current lap Overall analysis
i You can save up to nine laps. 왘 Press button æ while the timer is i These functions are only available if you
running. have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
왘 Press button ç while the timer is RACETIMER.
running. The timer stops.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
The intermediate time will be shown for 왘 Press button ç.
until the AMG menu appears in the mul-
5 seconds. The lap time is reset to “0”. tifunction display.
왘 Press button ç within 5 seconds. 왘 Press button j repeatedly until the
Deleting all laps
The intermediate time shown will be overall analysis appears in the multi-
saved as a lap time. i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. function display.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new 왘 Press button æ while the timer is
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as running.
soon as the intermediate time is called
The timer stops.
up.
왘 Press the reset button twice
(컄 page 26).
왘 Press button æ. 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2 Overall driving time
The timer starts. The saved laps are 3 Maximum speed
deleted. 4 Overall distance driven
i When you switch off the engine, the 5 Average speed
1 Gear indicator
RACETIMER will be reset to“0” after 30 seconds.
2 RACETIMER All laps are deleted.
3 Best lap time
4 Lap number
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Lap analysis i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The The symbol y appears in the lower
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1. multifunction display.
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER. Off-road Mode menu
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
Off-road mode
3 Maximum speed
4 Lap length 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
5 Average speed during lap the off-road driving program On or Off.
왘 Press button j or k to see
other lap analyses.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
160
Controls in detail
Control system
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Please refer to the COMAND system The vehicle status message memory menu
manual for instructions on how to activate only appears, if messages have been
the route guidance system. stored.
AIRMATIC*/Compass menu
Warning! G
The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Malfunction and warning messages are only
messages for air suspension* and the
until the desired setting is found. indicated for certain systems and are inten-
direction into which you are currently
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
driving. For information on air suspension, see “Air
and warning messages are simply a remind-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly suspension program*” (컄 page 254).
er with respect to the operation of certain
until one of the following messages ap- For information on the compass, see systems and do not replace the owner’s
pears in the multifunction display. “Vehicle submenu” (컄 page 173) and and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
Vehicles with steel suspension: “Compass” (컄 page 307). the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
Vehicle status message memory menu performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Use the vehicle status message memory Light Truck Center to address the malfunc-
menu to scan malfunction and warning tion and warning messages (컄 page 413).
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Vehicles with air suspension* or multifunction display and are based on
until the vehicle status message
ML 63 AMG: conditions or system status the vehicle’s
memory appears in the multifunction
system has recorded.
display.
162
Controls in detail
Control system
If the vehicle status message memory Should the vehicle’s system record any Settings menu
menu does not appear, no messages have conditions while driving, the number of
been stored. messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
tion display functions:
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of 앫 when the SmartKey in the starter 앫 The function Reset to factory
messages appears in the multifunction switch is turned to position 0 or settings?, with which you can reset all
display: removed from the starter switch. the settings to the original factory
settings.
or
앫 A collection of submenus with which
앫 when you turn off the engine by
you can make individual settings for
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
your vehicle.
button (컄 page 67) in the starter
switch once and open the driver’s door 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
(this puts the starter switch in until the Settings menu appears in the
왘 Press button k or j. multifunction display.
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
The stored messages will now be removed from the starter switch)
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred. For malfunctions and
i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-
warning messages, see “Vehicle status er switch to position 1 or 2, or when you press
messages in the multifunction display” the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
(컄 page 413). twice without depressing the brake pedal. You
will then only see high priority messages in the
i After you have scrolled through all recorded multifunction display (컄 page 413).
status messages, the first recorded message
appears again.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings i The settings you have changed will not be
available in the Settings menu: reset unless you confirm the action by pressing
You can reset the functions of all
the reset button a second time.
submenus to the factory settings.
Function Page After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
왘 Press the reset button in the instru- menu reappears in the multifunction display
Resetting all settings 164
ment cluster (컄 page 145) for (컄 page 163).
Submenus in the settings menu 165 approximately 3 seconds.
Instrument cluster submenu 167
i For safety reasons, the function
The request to press the reset button Lamp Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting
Time/Date submenu 169 once more to confirm appears in the submenu cannot be reset while driving.
Lighting submenu 170 multifunction display. The following message appears in the multifunc-
tion display:
Vehicle submenu 173 Settings
Comfort submenu* 176 Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
while driving.
164
Controls in detail
Control system
165
Controls in detail
Control system
166
Controls in detail
Control system
167
Controls in detail
Control system
168
Controls in detail
Control system
Example illustration for setting the hour Example illustration for setting the month
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
hour. month.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with In low ambient light conditions the
button æ or ç to the Lighting following lamps will switch on additionally:
Access the Lighting submenu via the
submenu.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting 앫 Parking lamps
submenu to change the lamp and lighting 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Tail lamps
settings on your vehicle. until the message Lamp Circuit
Headlamp appears in the multifunction 앫 License plate lamps
The following functions are available:
display. 앫 Side marker lamps
Function Page The selection marker is on the current For more information on the daytime
Setting daytime running lamp 170 setting. running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
mode (USA only) (컄 page 135).
Setting locator lighting 171 i For safety reasons, changing the setting for
Setting night security illumination 171 the daytime running lamp mode is not possible
while the vehicle is in motion. The following
Setting interior lighting delayed 172 message appears in the multifunction display:
shut-off Settings
왘 Press button æ or ç to select can only be made
Setting daytime running lamp mode manual operation (Manual) or daytime at a standstill.
(USA only) running lamp mode (Constant). For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings
(컄 page 164) while driving will not deactivate the
i This function is not available in countries With daytime running lamp mode activated
daytime running lamp mode.
where the daytime running lamp mode is and the exterior lamp switch in
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination
button æ or ç to the Lighting (Headlamps delayed shut-off)
With the locator lighting feature activated,
the exterior lamp switch in position U submenu. Use this function to set whether you would
(컄 page 135) and the interior lighting in au- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly like the exterior lamps to remain on for
tomatic mode (컄 page 143), the following until the message Surround Lighting 15 seconds during darkness after exiting
lamps will switch on during darkness when Function appears in the multifunction the vehicle and closing all doors.
the vehicle is unlocked using button Œ display.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off
on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
The selection marker is on the current feature activated and the exterior lamp
KEYLESS-GO:
setting. switch in position U before the engine
앫 Parking lamps is turned off, the following lamps will
switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Parking lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Front fog lamps*
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch 앫 Side marker lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the the locator lighting function On or Off.
driver’s door is opened. 앫 Front fog lamps
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
If you do not open a door after unlocking position U when exiting the vehicle. If after turning off the engine you do not
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps open a door or do not close an opened
will switch off automatically after The locator lighting feature is door, the lamps will automatically switch
approximately 40 seconds. activated. off after 60 seconds.
171
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
button æ or ç to the Lighting position U before turning off the Use this function to set whether you would
submenu. engine. like the interior lighting to remain on for
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly The headlamps delayed shut-off 10 seconds during darkness after you have
until the message Headlamp Delayed feature is activated. removed the SmartKey from the starter
Shut-off appears in the multifunction switch.
You can temporarily deactivate the
display.
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: 왘 Move the selection marker with
The selection marker is on the current button æ or ç to the Lighting
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
setting. submenu.
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Interior Lighting
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
to 0.
multifunction display.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
The selection marker is on the current
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature the starter switch.
On or Off. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
in the starter switch (컄 page 41).
172
Controls in detail
Control system
173
Controls in detail
Control system
174
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of Audio search function Setting automatic central locking
between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h
Use of the Audio search function to select Use this function to activate or deactivate
and 10 km/h).
a radio station will enable you to start a the automatic central locking. With the
When calibration was successful, the frequency scan (Frequency) (컄 page 160) automatic central locking system
following message appears in the mul- or select a radio station stored in memory activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
tifunction display: (Memory). vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
Compass Calibration (15 km/h).
왘 Move the selection marker with
Completed Successfully
button æ or ç to the Vehicle 왘 Move the selection marker with
i If the message Compass Calibration submenu. button æ or ç to the Vehicle
Completed Successfully does not appear in submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
the multifunction display, drive another full
until the message Audio Search 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
circle.
Function appears in the multifunction until the message Automatic Door
If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes,
display. Locking appears in the multifunction
the message Compass Calibration appears
in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the The selection marker is on the current display.
compass has failed due to outside influences. setting. The selection marker is on the current
Repeat compass calibration in a different setting.
location.
175
Controls in detail
Control system
176
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with Setting fold-in function* for exterior
button æ or ç to the Comfort rear view mirrors
submenu. Using this function, you can set the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly exterior rear view mirrors to be automati-
until the message cally folded in when you lock your vehicle.
Easy-entry Function appears in the
multifunction display. i With this function set to On and the exterior 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
rear view mirrors folded in using the button on
The selection marker is on the current the door control panel (컄 page 200), the exterior function On or Off.
setting. rear view mirrors will not fold out when you
switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold Vehicle configuration
out the exterior rear view mirrors using the
button on the door control panel (컄 page 200). The following functions are available:
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off. Function Page
DSR set speed 178
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Comfort
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
submenu.
the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Fold In Mirrors
When Locking appears in the multi-
function display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) 왘 Press button æ or ç repeatedly Trip computer menu
programmed default speed until the desired speed is shown in the
multifunction display. Use the trip computer menu to call up
In the DSR menu, you can program the
statistical data on your vehicle.
default speed the DSR is set to when it is When DSR is switched on, DSR will use
activated. the programmed default speed to regu- The following information is available:
late the vehicle’s speed.
You can program the default speed be- Function Page
tween 4-10 mph (Canada: 6-18 km/h). i Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the
The set value is increased in 1 mph set speed using the cruise control lever Fuel consumption statistics 179
(Canada: 2 km/h) increments. (컄 page 251). since start
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since start Fuel consumption statistics since last Resetting fuel consumption statistics
reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message From Start appears 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message From Start appears
in the multifunction display. until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the fuel consumption statistics
until the message From Reset appears which you want to reset appear in the
in the multifunction display. multifunction display.
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 145) until
1 Distance driven since start the respective values are reset to 0.
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
4 Average fuel consumption since start matically to 0 when either of the following values
is exceeded:
i All statistics stored since the last engine 1 Distance driven since last reset 앫 distance covered: 100000 miles
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after 2 Time elapsed since last reset
앫 time elapsed: 10000 hours
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to 3 Average speed since last reset
position 0 or removed from the starter switch. 4 Average fuel consumption since last
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey reset
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
179
Controls in detail
Control system
180
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the multi- Answering a call Dialing a number from the phone book
function display depends on whether your When your telephone is ready to receive If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
telephone is switched on or off: calls, you can answer a call at any time. In you may select and dial a number from the
앫 If the telephone is off, the message the multifunction display you will then see phone book at any time.
TEL Off appears in the multifunction the message, or if available, the caller ID
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
display. (name and number):
until the message TEL appears in the
앫 If the telephone is on: multifunction display.
The telephone will then search for a 왘 Press button j or k.
network. During this time the multi-
The control system reads the phone
function display is empty.
book which is stored in the telephone.
As soon as the telephone has found a This may take several minutes. The
network, the message Ready appears in 왘 Press button s. message Please Wait appears in the
the multifunction display. multifunction display.
You have answered the call. The
duration of the call appears in the When the message Please Wait
multifunction display. disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
call until the desired name appears in the
왘 Press button t. multifunction display.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can The stored names are displayed in
operate it using the control system. ascending or descending alphabetical
order. 컄컄
181
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 Redialing
The control system stores the most
recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through your
entire phone book.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
1 Name from the phone book 앫 If no connection is made, the until the message TEL appears in the
control system stores the dialed multifunction display.
i If you press and hold button j or k number in the redial memory.
for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls 왘 Press button s.
rapidly through the list of names until you
release the button again. The first number in the redial memory
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing appears in the multifunction display.
button t. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button s. until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The system dials the selected phone
number. 왘 Press button s.
앫 If the connection is successful and The control system dials the selected
this feature is supported by your phone number.
network provider, the name of the
party (if stored in your phone book)
you are calling and the duration of
the call will appear in the multifunc-
tion display.
182
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever
automatic transmission, see “Automatic Warning! G
transmission” (컄 page 54). The gear selector lever is located on the
Make sure that absolutely no objects are right of the steering column.
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between the
automatic transmission reacts by pedals. You could then no longer brake or
adjusting its shift program. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission injury.
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation
catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up more quickly P Park position
to operating temperature. R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
184
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
185
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting from D or R to N Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
If you want to select neutral position N
The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached.
with the transmission being in drive
vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
position D or reverse gear R:
앫 drive position D (컄 page 187) with gear when the vehicle is stopped.
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
ranges (컄 page 192) Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. period when driving off on slippery road
앫 the selected program mode (M/C/S) surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(ML 63 AMG only) (컄 page 194) drivetrain which is not covered by the
(컄 page 65).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with (컄 page 190) With drive position D selected, you can use
the engine switched off and the transmission set
the steering wheel gearshift control
to neutral position N (컄 page 184), do not 앫 the vehicle speed
depress the parking brake pedal. buttons (컄 page 193) to influence trans-
mission shifting by:
왘 Move gear selector lever up to resis-
앫 limiting the gear range
tance point when in drive position D or
down to resistance point when in 앫 changing gears manually
reverse gear R to select neutral
position N.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
186
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
187
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
i Make it a practice to always shift into park Effect ! If you turn off the engine using the
position P before turning off the engine and SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
í Reverse gear button, the transmission will shift to neutral
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch Shift into reverse gear R only position N automatically.
or when the vehicle is stopped. If you want the gear position to remain in
앫 open a front door ë Neutral neutral position N, e.g. when taking the
vehicle through an automatic conveyor
or when using KEYLESS-GO*, before turning off No power is transmitted from the
the engine with the start/stop button and open-
type car wash, observe the following
engine to the drive axle. When instructions.
ing a front door. the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed). Warning! G
To avoid damage to the transmis- When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey
sion, never shift into neutral with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do
position N while driving. not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
If the ESP® is deactivated or It is possible for children to switch on the
malfunctioning: ignition which could result in unsupervised
Shift into neutral position N only use of vehicle equipment.
if the vehicle is in danger of A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
skidding, e.g. on icy roads. could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
188
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
189
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
190
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Rocking the vehicle Hill start assist system The hill start assist system is inactive
Rocking the vehicle by shifting between 앫 when starting off on a level road or
drive position D and reverse gear R can Warning! G downhill grades
help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow.
앫 with the transmission in neutral
The engine control system of this vehicle The hill start assist system is not designed
position N
electronically limits shifting between to function as a parking brake and does not
drive position D and reverse gear R to prevent the vehicle from moving when 앫 with the parking brake set
very low speeds, i.e. approximately parked on an incline. 앫 if the ESP® has switched off due to a
5 mph (9 km/h). To shift between drive Always set the parking brake in addition to malfunction
position D and reverse gear R, move the shifting to park position P.
gear selector lever past the resistance Towing a trailer
point up or down.
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of If you tow a trailer, note the following
more than 5°, the hill start assist system points:
Working on the vehicle
maintains the pressure in the brake sys-
앫 Manually shift to a lower gear range
tem for approximately 1 second after you
Warning! G have released the brake pedal. Therefore,
(컄 page 192) if the transmission hunts
between gears on inclines.
you can start off smoothly without the
When working on the vehicle, set the vehicle moving immediately after releasing A lower gear range and reduction of
parking brake and shift to park position P. the brake pedal. speed reduces the chance to overload
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. or overheat the engine.
For more information on trailer towing, see
the “Operation” section (컄 page 328).
191
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
192
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
193
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Extending gear range Shifting into optimal gear range You can choose between automatic shift
program C or S and manual shift
왘 Briefly press right shift button 2. 왘 Press and hold left shift button 1.
program M.
The transmission will shift to the next The transmission will automatically
higher gear as permitted by the shift select the gear range suited for optimal
program. This action simultaneously acceleration and deceleration. This will
extends the gear range of the automat- involve shifting down one or more
ic transmission (컄 page 192). gears.
i If you press on the accelerator when the Shift program (ML 63 AMG only)
engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmis-
sion will upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Canceling gear range limit 1 Program mode selector switch
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
왘 Press and hold right shift button 2 when the vehicle is stopped. M Manual For manual gear shifting
until the cipher for the current gear
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended C Comfort For standard driving
range disappears from the multifunc- period when driving off on slippery road
tion display (컄 page 192). surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the S Sport For sporty driving
drivetrain which is not covered by the
The transmission will shift from the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Never change the program mode when the
current gear range directly to gear automatic transmission is out of park position P.
range D. This could result in a change of driving character-
istics for which you may not be prepared.
194
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The selected program mode appears in the 앫 Traction and driving stability are Activating manual shift program
multifunction display. improved on icy roads.
왘 Press program mode selector switch
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when repeatedly until the M for the manual
you give more gas. The engine then program mode M appears in the multi-
operates at lower rpms and the function display.
wheels are less likely to spin.
The transmission switches to the
Select S for sporty driving: manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
1 Current program mode 앫 The vehicle starts out in first gear.
is not limited.
앫 Upshifts occur later.
Automatic shift program You can change the gears manually with
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is drive position D selected. You can upshift
You can choose between automatic shift switched on when the engine is restarted. or downshift through the gears in succes-
program C or S. sion.
왘 Press program mode selector switch Manual shift program
i The manual program mode M will not be
repeatedly until the letter of the In the manual program mode M, stored. When the engine is turned off with the
desired program mode appears in the system-controlled automatic gearshifting manual program mode M selected, the transmis-
multifunction display. is switched off and you need to change the sion will go to the automatic program mode
the gears by manually upshifting or down- (C or S) when the engine is restarted.
Select C for standard driving:
shifting using the steering wheel gearshift
앫 The vehicle starts out in second control buttons to the left and right of the
gear (both forward and reverse) for steering wheel (컄 page 193).
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
195
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
196
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
197
Controls in detail
Transfer case
198
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see Rear view mirrors Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 60). The reflection brightness of the exterior
For more information on setting the rear
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 49).
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
The headlamps will automatically be Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
cleaned with a high-pressure water jet position 앫 the ignition is switched on
when you have and
앫 switched on the headlamps 앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on
and the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
앫 operated the windshield wipers with
windshield washer fluid five times The rear view mirror will not react if
When you switch off the headlamps, the 앫 the automatic transmission is set to
counter resets. position R
For information on filling up the washer 앫 the interior lighting is turned on
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window 1 Lever
washer system and headlamp cleaning
왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
system*” (컄 page 346).
by moving lever 1 towards the wind-
shield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
199
Controls in detail
Good visibility
The auto-dimming function does not react if The power folding rear view mirrors may
! Before you drive the vehicle through an have to be synchronized after the vehicle
incoming light is not aimed directly at sen- automatic car wash, fold the exterior rear view
sors in the interior rear view mirror. mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged. battery has been disconnected or dis-
charged. If the exterior rear view mirrors
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior do not fold properly upon locking or un-
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
in and out automatically locking the vehicle although the corre-
react, for example, when transporting cargo sponding function in the control system is
which covers the rear window. When the corresponding function in the activated (컄 page 177), do the following:
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles control system is activated (컄 page 177):
왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror in
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, 앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat- completely (컄 page 201).
you may not be able to observe traffic con- ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
ditions and could cause an accident. 왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
locked from the outside.
completely (컄 page 201).
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat-
ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
Warning! G unlocked and the driver’s or front pas- properly upon locking the vehicle, the exte-
senger door are subsequently opened. rior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise
Exercise care when using the passen- repeat the above steps.
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
200
Controls in detail
Good visibility
201
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Vanity mirror
202
Controls in detail
Good visibility
203
Controls in detail
Climate control
204
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
4 Windshield air vents
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
6 Left center air vent, adjustable
7 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
9 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
a Right side air vent, adjustable
b Front passenger door air vent, fixed
c Climate control panel
d Footwell air vents
205
Controls in detail
Climate control
206
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- Warning! G
the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. Follow the recommended settings for heat-
cools or heats the interior depending on ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
the selected interior temperature and the
current outside temperature.
Warning! G impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
Warning! G may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the in-
When operating the climate control, the air reduce the air volume to the interior and the terior before driving off, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 237). The climate control will
that enters the passenger compartment windows could fog up, impairing visibility
then adjust the interior temperature to the set
through the air vents can be very hot or very and endangering you and others. Have a value much faster.
cold (depending on the set temperature). clogged filter replaced as soon as possible
Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro- at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
shield free of snow and debris.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air Center.
vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between un- The air conditioning will not engage (no
protected parts of the body and the air cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution (컄 page 214).
controls (컄 page 206) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
207
Controls in detail
Climate control
208
Controls in detail
Climate control
209
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air volume Closing the center air vents Front defroster
왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8
Five blower speeds are available. You can use this setting to defrost the
(컄 page 204) to the left.
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You
왘 Press button to decrease or
The corresponding center air vents on can also use it to defog the windshield and
button Q to increase air volume
the left and right are closed. door windows.
(컄 page 206) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U Opening the side air vents i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the door windows are clear again.
(컄 page 206) goes out. The automatic
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and b
operation of air volume switches off.
(컄 page 204) to the right. Activating
The selected blower speed is shown in
the air volume display b The corresponding side air vents on the 왘 Press button | (컄 page 206).
(컄 page 206). left and right are open.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Adjusting air volume for the center and Closing the side air vents
side air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and b
(컄 page 204) to the left.
Opening the center air vents
The corresponding side air vents on the
왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 8 left and right are closed.
(컄 page 204) to the right.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
210
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control switches to the follow- Adjustments The indicator lamp on button |
ing functions automatically: You can adjust the air volume and the tem-
goes out. The indicator lamp on
button 9 comes on.
앫 most efficient blower speed and perature when the front defroster is
heating power, depending on outside switched on. The air flow will remain on the i The air conditioning compressor remains on
temperature windshield and front door windows. even if the indicator lamp in button | goes
out. This helps to prevent the windshield from
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the 왘 Press button to decrease or fogging.
front door windows (side air vents must button Q to increase air volume
be open) (컄 page 206) to the desired level.
앫 the air conditioning compressor The air volume decreases/increases to
switches on at outside temperatures the next lower/higher blower speed
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for and heating switches to the tempera-
air-drying ture that was set before the front de-
froster was switched on.
The indicator lamp on button |
goes out. The indicator lamp on
button 9 comes on.
or
왘 Turn temperature control 1
and/or 7 (컄 page 206) slightly in any
direction.
Heating switches to the temperature
that was set before the front defroster
was switched on.
211
Controls in detail
Climate control
212
Controls in detail
Climate control
213
Controls in detail
Climate control
214
Controls in detail
Climate control
215
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear climate control* 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable Deactivating rear climate control
216
Controls in detail
Climate control
217
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
218
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
4 Windshield air vents
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
6 Left center air vent, adjustable
7 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
9 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
a Right side air vent, adjustable
b Front passenger door air vent, fixed
c Automatic climate control panel
d Footwell air vents
219
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
220
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
The automatic climate control is a 3-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the automat-
Warning! G intelligent automatic climate control sys- ic climate control determines the relation
tem. Your vehicle interior is divided into of the sun to the vehicle and automatically
When operating the automatic climate con- 3 zones. adjusts the inside temperature for every
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- individual zone.
partment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- The automatic climate control is operation-
perature). This may cause burns or frostbite al whenever the engine is running. It cools
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the vehicle’s interior according to the an-
the air vents. gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-
side temperature and the selected
Always keep sufficient distance between un- temperature. You can operate the auto-
protected parts of the body and the air matic climate control in either the auto-
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution matic or manual mode.
controls (컄 page 220) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
221
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and Deactivating the automatic climate
odors are filtered out before outside air en- Warning! G control system
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system. Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following Warning! G
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
Warning! G impairing visibility and endangering you and When the automatic climate control system
others. is switched off, the outside air supply and
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
circulation are also switched off. Only
may require replacement of the filter before
choose this settings for a short time. Other-
its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the in-
terior before driving off, see “Summer opening wise the windows could fog up, impairing
reduce the air volume to the interior and the
feature” (컄 page 237). The automatic climate visibility and endangering you and others.
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
control will then adjust the interior temperature
and endangering you and others. Have a to the set value much faster.
clogged filter replaced as soon as possible Deactivating
Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck 왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 220) until
shield free of snow and debris.
Center. the display e (컄 page 220) is cleared.
The indicator lamp on the button
The air conditioning will not engage (no comes on.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 220).
222
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
223
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
224
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Opening the side air vents Front defroster 앫 the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and b
You can use this setting to defrost the above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
(컄 page 218) to the right.
windshield, such as when it is iced up. You air-drying
The corresponding side air vents on the can also use it to defog the windshield and
left and right are open. door windows. Adjustments
Closing the side air vents i Keep this setting selected only until the You can adjust the air volume and the tem-
windshield or the side windows are clear again. perature when the front defroster is
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and b switched on. The air flow will remain on the
(컄 page 218) to the left. Activating windshield and front door windows.
The corresponding side air vents on the 왘 Press button | (컄 page 220). 왘 Press button to decrease or
left and right are closed. button Q to increase air volume
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. (컄 page 220) to the desired level.
Adjusting air volume
The automatic climate control switches to The air volume decreases/increases to
Five blower speeds are available. the following functions automatically: the next lower/higher blower speed
and heating switches to the tempera-
왘 Press button to decrease or 앫 most efficient blower speed and ture that was set before the front de-
button Q to increase air volume heating power, depending on outside froster was switched on.
(컄 page 220) to the desired level. temperature
The indicator lamp on button |
The indicator lamp on button U 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the goes out. The indicator lamp on
goes out. front door windows (side air vents must button 9 comes on.
The automatic mode is switched off. be open)
or 컄컄
The selected blower speed appears in
the display e (컄 page 220).
225
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
컄컄 왘 Turn temperature control 1 Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
and/or 7 (컄 page 220) slightly in any
direction. i Keep this setting selected only until the If the air distribution control as well as the
windshield is clear again.
airflow volume control are set to U and
Heating switches to the temperature
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on there is a high need for cooling, the
that was set before the front defroster
(컄 page 61). MAXCOOL function is activated.
was switched on.
왘 Press button U (컄 page 220). “MAXCOOL” appears in the front and rear
The indicator lamp on button |
The indicator lamp on button U display.
goes out. The indicator lamp on
button 9 comes on. goes out. Air volume and air This provides the fastest possible cooling
distribution are controlled separately of the vehicle interior (when windows and
i The air conditioning compressor remains on for each zone. tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).
even if the indicator lamp in button | goes
out. This helps to prevent the windshield from If the automatic air distribution and
fogging. air volume are switched off:
왘 Press buttons 8 and Y
Deactivating
(컄 page 220).
왘 Press button | (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 220).
226
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
227
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
228
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
229
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
230
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Rear automatic climate control 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable Activating rear automatic climate
control
The control panel is located at the rear of 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
the front center console. 3 Temperature control i The automatic climate control must be
switched on (컄 page 223).
4 Air distribution and air volume
왘 Press button U.
(automatic, manual)
5 Air distribution (directs air through The indicator lamp on the button
the center air vents) comes on. The temperature, air vol-
ume, and air distribution are adjusted
6 Air distribution (directs air through automatically.
the footwells and side air vents)
7 Rear automatic climate control Deactivating rear automatic climate
on/off control
8 Decreasing air volume 왘 Press button ´.
9 Indicator lamps for air volume The indicator lamp on the button goes
settings out.
a Increasing air volume The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
i The stored values for the rear automatic i Switch off the rear automatic climate con-
climate control are erased from memory after
trol for improved cooling or heating output in the
the ignition has been switched off for more than
front passenger compartment.
30 minutes. Once the front automatic climate
control is switched on again, the rear automatic You can also switch off the rear automatic
climate control operates in automatic mode at a climate control from the front passenger com-
preset temperature of 72°F (22°C). partment (컄 page 220).
231
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
232
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
The indicator lamp on button U i The rear automatic climate control will not
goes out. cool the air when the air conditioning is switched
off (컄 page 229).
233
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting manually
Five blower speeds are available.
왘 Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume to
the desired level.
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out. The selected blower speed is
shown by the indicator lamps for air
volume settings 9 (컄 page 231).
Adjusting automatically
왘 Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
234
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
The door windows are opened and closed i You can also open or close the windows
If a door window encounters an obstruction
electrically. The switches for all door win- using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
dows are located on the driver’s door con- ture” (컄 page 237) and see “Convenience clos-
you pulled the switch past the resistance ing feature” (컄 page 238).
trol panel. The switches for the respective
point and released it to close the door win-
door windows are located on the front Depending on the current position, the power
dow, the automatic reversal function will
passenger door and the rear doors. windows may also open or close when the air
stop the window and open it slightly. recirculation button : on the control panel of
If a door window encounters an obstruction the climate control (컄 page 206) or automatic
Warning! G that blocks its path in a circumstance where climate control* (컄 page 220) is pressed and
held.
you are closing a door window by pulling and
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
holding the switch, or by pressing and hold- i After switching off the ignition (컄 page 39)
ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, by press- or removing the SmartKey from the starter
by the closing procedure. switch, the windows can be operated
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles
Activate the override switch (컄 page 96) with KEYLESS-GO*) on a door handle, the 앫 until you open the driver’s or front passenger
when children are riding in the back seats of automatic reversal function will not operate. door
the vehicle. The children could otherwise in- 앫 for at least 5 minutes if nor door was opened
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
in the window opening.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
The closing of a door window can be imme- lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
diately halted by releasing the switch or, if tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
switch was pulled past the resistance point unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
and released, by either pressing or pulling access to a vehicle could result in an
the respective switch. accident and/or serious personal injury.
235
Controls in detail
Power windows
Door windows Opening the door windows Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
(컄 page 236) to the resistance point. 왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
(컄 page 236) past the resistance point
The corresponding door window moves
and release.
downwards until you release the
switch. The corresponding door window opens
completely.
Closing the door windows
Fully closing the door windows
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
(Express-close)
(컄 page 236) to the resistance point.
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
1 Left front door window The corresponding door window moves
2 Right front door window upwards until you release the switch. (컄 page 236) past the resistance point
3 Right rear door window and release.
4 Left rear door window
Warning! G The corresponding door window closes
completely.
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the door window, and upward movement Warning! G
of the door window is blocked by some ob-
struction including but not limited to arms, Driver’s door only:
hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
will not operate. past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not function.
236
Controls in detail
Power windows
i If the upward movement of a door window is Synchronizing the door windows Summer opening feature
blocked during the closing procedure, the door
window will stop and open slightly. The door windows must be resynchronized If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
왘 Remove the obstruction. 앫 after the battery was disconnected
neously:
왘 Pull the respective door window switch 앫 if the door windows cannot be fully
앫 opening the door windows
past the resistance point again and opened (Express-open) or closed
release. (Express-close) 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
i If the door window still does not close when i Each door window must be resynchronized 앫 switching on the seat ventilation* for
there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respec- separately. the driver’s seat
tive power window switch. The door window will
왘 Close all doors.
then close without the obstruction sensor
function. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘 Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
Stopping door windows during
Express-operation (컄 page 236).
왘 Press or pull the respective door Once a door window is closed com-
window switch again. pletely, hold the respective switch for
approximately 3 seconds.
The door window is synchronized. 컄컄
237
Controls in detail
Power windows
238
Controls in detail
Power windows
239
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
240
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
241
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
242
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40). 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main box.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
switch.
왘 Press and hold the sunroof switch in
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 241)
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 41).
raised at the rear.
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
왘 Hold the sunroof switch in the direction
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey of arrow 3 for approximately
removed from the starter switch). 1 second.
The driver’s door then can be 왘 Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
closed again. Express-open feature (컄 page 242).
왘 Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
sunroof from the fuse box completely, it is synchronized.
(컄 page 504). If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
i For information on which fuse box contains completely:
the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see
왘 Repeat the above steps.
the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 448).
243
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are 앫 Air suspension program* Cruise control
described on the following pages: The system consists of two compo-
nents. The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control (컄 page 244), with
the speed you set for your vehicle.
which the vehicle can maintain a preset 앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
speed. (컄 page 255), which adjusts the The use of cruise control is recommended
vehicle suspension characteristics. for driving at a constant speed for extend-
앫 Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
ed periods of time. You can set or resume
(컄 page 249), which supports you 앫 Vehicle level control*
cruise control at any speed above
when you are driving downhill. (컄 page 255), which controls the
20 mph (30 km/h).
vehicle level.
앫 Off-road driving program (컄 page 253),
The cruise control function is operated by
which supports you when you are driv- 앫 Parktronic* (컄 page 259) and rear view
means of the cruise control lever.
ing off-road. camera* (컄 page 264), which serve as
a parking aid. The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP,
column (컄 page 24).
ESP®, and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety sys-
tems” (컄 page 98). i The cruise control should not be activated
during off-road driving.
244
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G
The cruise control is a convenience system The cruise control brakes automatically so
designed to assist the driver during vehicle that the set speed is not exceeded. The
operation. The driver is and must always brake pedal depresses when the cruise con-
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed trol engages the brakes.
and for safe brake operation. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic including the area under the brake pedal.
and weather conditions make it advisable to Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
travel at a constant speed. movement which could interfere with the 1 Setting current or higher speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be braking ability of the cruise control system. Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy Do not place your foot under the brake pedal the resistance point) or 5 mph
traffic because conditions do not allow – your foot could become caught. increments (past the resistance point)
safe driving at a constant speed. (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a 2 Setting current or lower speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be convenience system designed to assist the
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
driver during vehicle operation. The driver is the resistance point) or 5 mph
changes in tire traction can result in
and must always remain responsible for the increments (past the resistance point)
wheel spin and loss of control.
vehicle’s speed and for safe brake (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when operation. 3 Canceling cruise control
driving in fog.
4 Resume to last set speed
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
245
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating cruise control Setting current speed i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
You can activate the cruise control when 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
the vehicle speed is above speed.
20 mph (30 km/h). On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s
In the following cases you cannot activate direction of arrow 1 or depress in braking system. In addition, on longer downhill
the cruise control: direction of arrow 2. grades the automatic transmission will down-
shift automatically.
앫 when you brake The current speed is set.
앫 when you have set the parking brake 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator Canceling cruise control
pedal.
앫 when the automatic transmission is set There are several ways to cancel the cruise
to position P, R, or N The cruise control is activated. control:
앫 if the ESP® is switched off The currently set speed appears in the 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
status indicator of the multifunction
앫 if theESP® has switched off due to a The cruise control is canceled. The last
display: speed set is stored for later use.
malfunction
앫 USA only:
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom- or
Cruise XXX Miles
eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
the cruise control system. 앫 Canada only: direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 245).
Ñ XXX km/h
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
i The last stored set speed is canceled when
the engine is turned off.
246
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The cruise control switches off i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
automatically when deactivate the cruise control. After a brief accel- increments
앫 you step on the brake pedal eration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will
resume the last set speed. i The set value is increased in 1 mph
앫 you depress the parking brake pedal (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
The cruise control switches off automatically and the cruise control lever up to the resistance
Setting a higher speed point.
an acoustic warning will sound when
앫 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) Warning! G the resistance point in direction of
앫 the ESP® is in operation arrow 1 (컄 page 245).
If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in
앫 the ESP® is switched off with the ESP® mind that it may take a brief moment until 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
switch (컄 page 102) the vehicle has reached the set speed. The vehicle speed increases in incre-
앫 the ESP® has switched off due to a Increase the set vehicle speed to a value ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1km/h).
malfunction (컄 page 405)
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
앫 you set the automatic transmission to N speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and Adjustment in 5 mph
while driving
unexpected acceleration of the vehicle (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Observe additional messages in the could cause an accident and/or serious in-
multifunction display that may appear. jury to you and others.
i The set value is increased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
! Setting the automatic transmission to N you lift the cruise control lever past the
while driving cancels the cruise control. You can increase the speed in two ways. resistance point.
However, the automatic transmission should not
be set to N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
247
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up You can reduce the speed in two ways. Adjustment in 5 mph
past the resistance point in direction of (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
arrow 1 (컄 page 245). i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically i The set value is decreased in 5 mph
왘 Release the cruise control lever. brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. press the cruise control lever down past the
The vehicle speed increases in incre- resistance point.
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will increments
down past the resistance point in direc-
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 245).
moment until the vehicle has reached the set i The set value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
speed. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
press the cruise control lever down to the resis-
tance point. The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
Setting a lower speed
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
down to the resistance point in direc- i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Warning! G tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 245). decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep 왘 Release the cruise control lever. speed.
in mind that it may take a brief moment until The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
the vehicle has reached the set speed. ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious in-
jury to you and others.
248
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) For more information, see “Off-road driv-
(“Resume” function) ing” (컄 page 319).
249
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Whenever DSR is switched on, DSR will use Switching the Downhill Speed
the programmed default speed to regulate the Regulation on/off Warning! G
vehicle’s speed. The default speed programmed
at the factory is 4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The The switch is located on the upper part of If the accelerator pedal is depressed while
default speed can be reprogrammed using the the center console. the Downhill Speed Regulation is activated,
control system (컄 page 178). The next time DSR the vehicle can drive faster than the pro-
is switched on, DSR will use the newly pro- grammed set speed. You should therefore
grammed default speed to regulate the vehicle’s
drive downhill with particular caution as it
speed.
could otherwise lead to an accident and/or
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set
serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind
speed using the cruise control lever
(컄 page 245). Keep in mind that adjusting the that as soon as you remove the foot from
set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR the accelerator pedal with the DSR switched
switched on will not change the programmed on, the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s
default speed. If DSR is switched off and then speed including use of brakes if required.
switched on again, DSR will use the programmed Depending on the programmed set speed,
default speed. 1 DSR on/off actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR
Depending on the road surface and level of 2 Indicator lamp can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
maintain the set speed. To maintain the set result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others.
250
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on Switching Downhill Speed Regulation off Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation
speed with DSR switched on
i The DSR can only be switched on if the vehi- 왘 Press DSR switch 1 (컄 page 250).
cle speed is below 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h). With the DSR switched on (컄 page 250),
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
the speed setting can be changed using
왘 Press DSR switch 1 (컄 page 250). The message DSR Off appears in the the cruise control lever.
The indicator lamp 2 comes on. multifunction display.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
The message DSR and the set speed ap- i At a speed above approximately 21 mph lever on the left-hand side of the steering
pear in the multifunction display. (Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR is column.
automatically switched off. The message DSR
Off appears in the multifunction display and an
acoustic signal sounds. For information on how
to switch DSR on again, see “Switching Downhill
Speed Regulation on” (컄 page 251).
251
Controls in detail
Driving systems
You can increase or reduce the set speed Reduce set speed: Adjustment in 5 mph
in two ways. (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direc- i The set value is increased or decreased in
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 251). 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
increments you lift or depress the cruise control lever past
왘 Release the cruise control lever. the resistance point.
i The set value is increased or decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time The vehicle speed decreases in incre- Increase set speed:
you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
resistance point. 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up
Each time the set speed is changed, past the resistance point in direction of
Increase set speed: DSR will appear in the multifunction dis- arrow 1 (컄 page 251).
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to play and the changed set speed is
shown. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 251). The vehicle speed increases in incre-
i The set speed is canceled when DSR is
switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
will use the programmed default speed Reduce set speed:
The vehicle speed increases in incre- (컄 page 178).
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in direc-
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 251).
252
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Release the cruise control lever. Off-road driving program The switch is located on the upper part of
the center console.
The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
The off-road driving program is designed to
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). i In the ML 63 AMG, the off-road driving
assist the driver when driving off-road in
program is switched on and off via the control
Each time the set speed is changed, terrain and crossing water. The off-road
system (컄 page 159).
DSR will appear in the multifunction dis- driving program adjusts the engine power
play and the newly set speed is shown. and shifting of the automatic transmission
to be more suitable for the off-road use of
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will the vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that it
may take a brief moment until the vehicle has 4-ETS designed for off-road use are
reached the new set speed. automatically activated.
i The set speed is canceled when DSR is In the following situations you should
switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR switch to the off-road driving program:
will use the programmed default speed 앫 during off-road driving
(컄 page 178).
앫 when crossing water (컄 page 324)
1 Switch for off-road driving program
앫 when towing up or down on steep 2 Indicator lamp
gradients
253
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Off-road driving program on Air suspension program* i From the Highway/High-speed level, the
vehicle is lowered to the ADS Sport level approx-
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 253).
The system consists of two components. imately 20 seconds after it is locked.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The The vehicle level control* regulates the From the raised level, the vehicle is not lowered
symbol y appears in the lower ride height of the vehicle. The Adaptive after it is locked.
multifunction display. Damping System (ADS)* optimizes your When the engine is started, the previously se-
vehicle’s suspension tuning. lected setting, e.g. ADS COMF, is selected again.
앫 Suspension tuning: Adaptive Damping ! Be sure to observe this vehicle’s differing
System (ADS)* (컄 page 255) values for ground clearance and vehicle height in
앫 Vehicle level control* (컄 page 255) comparison to standard vehicles. You could oth-
erwise damage the vehicle. The values for
ML 63 AMG 앫 opening the tailgate (컄 page 119)
Switching Off-road driving program off 앫 driving off-road (컄 page 319)
i The Air suspension program is part of the
standard equipment range. Due to the vehicle’s 앫 the vehicle’s main dimensions can be found
왘 Press switch 1 again.
sportier suspension tuning, in comparison with in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 520)
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The standard vehicles, the level positions in the ADS
symbol y disappears. settings as well as the speed thresholds for rais-
ing and lowering the vehicle have been modified.
254
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* The following settings are available: Vehicle level control*
앫 AUTO (for normal driving situations)
The fine tuning of the damping and suspen- The vehicle level control automatically
Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off.
sion is dependent on: regulates the ride height to
앫 SPORT (for sporty driving)
앫 your driving style 앫 reduce fuel consumption
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
앫 road surface conditions With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehi- 앫 improve driving stability by lowering
cle is lowered approximately 0.6 in the center of gravity
앫 your personal ADS settings
(15 mm). The vehicle automatically regulates its ride
앫 your personal vehicle level settings ML 63 AMG: height based on the set vehicle height and
The ADS switch is located on the upper The vehicle is lowered approximately the current speed:
part of the center console. 0.3 in (8 mm).
앫 As your driving speed increases, the ve-
앫 COMF (for comfort driving) hicle is lowered by increments until it
Indicator lamp 3 comes on. reaches high-speed level.
ML 63 AMG:
The vehicle is raised approximately Vehicles with ADS*:
0.28 in (7 mm). 앫 If you are driving with the ADS set-
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 39). ting COMF or AUTO, the vehicle is
raised back to highway level as your
왘 Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until driving speed decreases.
the desired suspension tuning is
reached. 앫 You can select the high-speed level
1 ADS switch via the ADS setting SPORT. In ADS
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting i The setting is stored when you turn off the Sport, the vehicle is lowered direct-
engine. ly to high-speed level as your driv-
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
ing speed increases.
255
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven ter-
set vehicle level as soon the doors and tail- Warning! G rain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may
gate are cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle with the ground and result in damage to the vehi-
앫 unlocked cle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has
level, the center of gravity also rises. There-
or fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to
a lower level.
as low as possible. With higher ride height
앫 opened or closed with the vehicle
the ESP® may activate earlier in certain ! Before jacking up the vehicle with equip-
unlocked
situations. ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com-
In order to operate the vehicle level control pletely off of the ground, remove the SmartKey
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
switch (컄 page 257), however, the engine from the starter switch.
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
must be running.
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot ! Please also note the information in the
prevent accidents, including those resulting section on towing (컄 page 499).
Warning! G from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot pre- For information on off-road driving, see
vent the natural laws of physics from acting “Off-road driving” (컄 page 319).
Make sure that no one is near the wheel on the vehicle.
housing or under the vehicle when you lower
the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs
could become wedged into or under the ve-
hicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
the tailgate is opened and will continue after
the door is closed again.
256
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the vehicle level Basic settings (all models, except The following is the approximate change in
ML 63 AMG) ride height for each of the level settings:
The switch is located on the upper part of
the center console. The following vehicle chassis ride heights
Level Ride height
can be selected using the vehicle level
switch in the center console: Raised + 3.1 in (80 mm)
Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm)
Level Driving situation
High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)
Raised For off-road driving or driv-
ing in rough terrain. The in-
dicator lamp is on. i Vehicles with ADS*:
Depending on the ADS setting (컄 page 255), the
Highway For driving on paved roads vehicle will be lowered to the high-speed level
in fair or better condition. when traveling at higher speeds. At speeds be-
The indicator lamp is off. low 40 mph (64 km/h) at the latest, it will be re-
1 Vehicle level switch turned to the highway level.
2 Indicator lamp
i The third available level is the high-speed i The high-speed level is not available if tow-
level that is set automatically. ing a trailer. For more information on towing a
trailer, see “Trailer towing” (컄 page 328).
257
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Basic settings (ML 63 AMG only) Raised level The following message appears in the mul-
tifunction display while the level is being
The following vehicle chassis ride heights Only select the raised level if appropriate
set:
can be selected using the vehicle level for the driving situation encountered.
switch in the center console: Otherwise:
앫 Fuel consumption may increase.
Level Driving situation
앫 Handling characteristics of the vehicle
Raised For off-road driving or driv-
ing in rough terrain. The in- may be unfavorable.
dicator lamp is on. i You can select the raised level at speeds up
Highway For driving on paved roads to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds, the i The message can be cleared by pressing
message n Level Selection Not the è ÿ k or button j on the
in fair or better condition. multifunction steering wheel.
Permitted appears in the multifunction dis-
The indicator lamp is off. play.
When the raised level is reached, indicator
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 40). lamp 2 (컄 page 257) comes on continu-
i The third available level is the high-speed ously and the following message appears
level that is set automatically. If indicator lamp 2 (컄 page 257) is off.
in the multifunction display for 5 seconds:
How much the vehicle is lowered or raised 왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 257).
depends on the ADS setting selected. At Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
the raised level, the vehicle is 2.9 in adjusts to the raised level.
(73 mm) higher than at the Highway level
with ADS AUTO.
258
Controls in detail
Driving systems
259
Controls in detail
Driving systems
260
Controls in detail
Driving systems
261
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five As your vehicle approaches an object, one
yellow and two red distance segments for or more distance segments will illuminate,
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic depending on the distance. When the red
ative distance between the sensors and an
system is operational when the readiness distance segment illuminates, you have
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
indicators 3 are illuminated. reached the minimum distance.
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The current transmission position deter- 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
cator for the rear area is located in the rear mines which warning indicator will be acti- warning lasting a maximum of
passenger compartment under the roof. vated. 2 seconds will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
Transmission Warning indicator constant acoustic warning lasting a
position maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
D Front area activated the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
R or N Front and rear area transmission is set to position P, or the
activated parking brake is set.
P Neither activated
앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound as the first red
Front area warning indicator distance segment illuminates and a
1 Left side of the vehicle constant acoustic warning lasting a
2 Right side of the vehicle maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
3 Readiness indicators the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is set to position D, P, or
the parking brake is set.
262
Controls in detail
Driving systems
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
264
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The rear view camera is an optical parking Switching the rear view camera on and
앫 there is a sudden change in tempera-
ture, e.g. if you drive into a heated ga- aid. It shows you the area behind the vehi- off
rage from the cold (lens condensation) cle in the COMAND system display when
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
reverse gear R is engaged, for example
앫 the camera lens is dirty or covered 왘 Shift the automatic transmission in
during parallel parking.
앫 the rear of your vehicle is damaged position R (컄 page 185).
The rear view camera is located near the
In this case, have the position and set- The area behind the vehicle appears in
tailgate handle.
ting of the camera checked by a quali- the COMAND system display.
fied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you i The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
visit a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck COMAND system display as a mirror image, like
Center for this purpose. in the rear view mirror.
Do not use the rear view camera in these sit- i The image from the rear view camera will no
uations. Otherwise you could injure yourself longer be displayed if you select another
or others and/or damage property including function on the COMAND system while reverse
your vehicle while parking/maneuvering. gear R is engaged. To display the image again,
disengage and reengage reverse gear R.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission
1 Rear view camera
into P, N or D to switch off the rear
view camera.
265
Controls in detail
Loading
Carriers* ! Load the carriers* in such a way that the Loading instructions
vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
Warning! G 앫 the tailgate can be completely opened
Warning! G
Only use carriers* when the basic carrier 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof can be completely Always fasten items being carried as secure-
bars* have been completely mounted. The raised at the rear ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
left and right roof rails are only stabilized by fastening materials appropriate for the
means of the basic carrier bars* mounted. weight and size of the load.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly at- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
tached carrier system or its load could be- around inside the vehicle, and can cause in-
come detached from the vehicle. jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of are securely fastened in the vehicle.
220 lb (100 kg). To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
Take into consideration that when the roof is sion or sudden maneuver, always use tie
loaded, the handling characteristics are dif- down rings, and if so equipped, always use
Roof rails
ferent from those when operating the vehi- the cargo net* when transporting cargo.
For further information, contact your
cles without a roof loaded. Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Center.
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
sciousness and death.
266
Controls in detail
Loading
cated on the certification label which can For additional safety when transporting
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied,
(컄 page 510). fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into
the opposite side buckles.
For more information, see “Tire and Load-
ing Information” (컄 page 352).
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
Load distribution tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, Please pay attention to and comply with
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas- the following instructions when loading the
sengers and luggage/cargo must never vehicle and transporting cargo: i The cargo compartment is the preferred
exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle place to carry objects. The expanded cargo com-
앫 Always place items being carried partment (컄 page 269) should only be used for
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as against front or rear seat backrests, items which do not fit in the cargo compartment
specified on the placard located on the and fasten them as securely as possi- alone.
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 510). In addi- ble.
tion, the load must be distributed in such a
way so that the weight on each axle never 앫 The heaviest portion of the cargo
exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating should always be kept as low as possi-
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The ble against front or rear seat backrests.
GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi-
267
Controls in detail
Loading
268
Controls in detail
Loading
G
consciousness and death.
Warning!
When expanding the cargo compartment, Folding the rear seat backrest forward
always fully fold the corresponding seats
! Always release the seat cushion and fold it
and, if so equipped, always use the up before folding the seat backrest forward. The
cargo net* (컄 page 272) when transporting covering on the seat backrest may otherwise be
cargo. damaged.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back- When the seat backrest are folded forward, the
1 Hook front seats may not be moved to the rearmost
rests must remain properly locked in the up-
Use the hooks to secure light weight items right position. position. Otherwise you could damage the front
only. The maximum permissible weight per and second-row seats. 컄컄
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
hook is 9 lb (4 kg).
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause
injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 268).
269
Controls in detail
Loading
270
Controls in detail
Loading
271
Controls in detail
Loading
i Before removing cargo compartment cover The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
blind behind the rear seats, fold the left or right of large, heavier objects into the passenger
rear seat forward. Afterwards, return the left or compartment in an accident. Such items
right rear seat into its original position. must be properly secured using the cargo
왘 Push release button 1. tie-down rings (컄 page 268) in the cargo
compartment floor.
왘 Pull blind 2 to the left against the
Passenger use of seats behind installed
spring pressure until the spring in the
cargo net is restricted because of the
cover audibly engages.
footwell being taken up by the net.
왘 Remove the blind.
272
Controls in detail
Loading
Use of the cargo net is a particularly impor- 앫 Without the cargo compartment ex- Installing the cargo net
tant safety factor when the vehicle is load- panded (컄 page 269), use holders
ed higher than the top of the seat above C-pillars 2 and the cargo
backrests with smaller objects. For your tie-down rings in the cargo compart-
safety, always use the cargo net when ment (컄 page 268).
transporting cargo.
앫 With the cargo compartment expanded
The cargo net can be installed in two (컄 page 269), use holders above
locations: B-pillars 1 and the cargo tie-down
rings behind the front seats
(컄 page 268).
왘 Open the hook and loop fasteners on Cargo net bar hung up behind the C-pillar
the cargo net package.
1 Holder
왘 Roll out the cargo net. 2 Cargo net bar
왘 Unfold the cargo net. 왘 Hang cargo net bar 2 on holder 1 as
The cargo net bars must audibly indicated by the arrow.
engage. 왘 Push cargo net bar 2 forward into
1 Holder in B-pillar holder 1 in direction of arrow.
2 Holder in C-pillar
273
Controls in detail
Loading
Pulling the cargo net tight Loosening the cargo net Removing and storing the cargo net
왘 Take cargo net bar 2 out of holder 1,
see “Installing the cargo net”
(컄 page 273).
왘 Press the red button on the upper and
lower cargo net bar.
왘 Fold the cargo net.
왘 Roll up the cargo net.
왘 Close the hook and loop fasteners on
Belt hook attached behind the front seats Belt hook attached behind the front seats the cargo net package.
1 Belt hook 1 Buckle
2 Cargo tie-down ring 2 Belt hook
3 Tightening belt 3 Cargo tie-down ring
왘 Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down 왘 Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
ring 2 in direction of arrow. buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow.
왘 Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end 왘 Remove belt hook 2 from cargo
in direction of arrow until the cargo net tie-down ring 3.
is pulled tight.
왘 After driving a short distance, make
sure the cargo net is still tight and, if
necessary, pull it tight again.
274
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo management system* Inserting the mounting elements into i You can turn the mounting element in the
the cargo rails cargo rail to four positions:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo ‹ To lock the mounting element.
management system and accompanying
N To insert or remove the cargo tie-down
accessories which enables you to utilize
ring, the belt reel or the telescoping rod.
your cargo compartment in a variety of
ways. You can store the cargo manage- L To insert or remove the mounting ele-
ment.
ment system in the pouch that comes with
the vehicle. S To move the mounting element to the
next engaging point.
i The pouch and the telescoping rod are locat- 왘 Turn mounting element 2 to L.
ed under the cargo compartment floor.
왘 Insert mounting element 2 in cargo
1 Cargo rail rail 1.
2 Mounting element
왘 Turn mounting element 2 until it en-
You can move the mounting element 2 to gages in the ‹ position.
various engaging points on the
cargo rail 1 and fix it in place. You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
These engaging points are located
2 inches apart from one another on the
cargo rail and are indicated by markings.
1 Cargo rails
275
Controls in detail
Loading
Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the 왘 Insert cargo tie-down ring 1 into i The belt reel can be used to tighten
mounting element mounting element 2. light-weight loads against the side wall of the
cargo compartment, thus securing them from
왘 Turn mounting element 2 until it en- slipping.
gages in the ‹ position.
왘 Insert two mounting elements 2 into a
You should be able to feel the mounting cargo rail.
element engage in the cargo rail.
왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
Belt reel rail to N.
왘 Insert belt reel 1 into mounting
element 2.
왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
1 Cargo tie-down ring rail until it engages in the ‹ posi-
2 Mounting element tion.
You should be able to feel the mounting
Warning! G element engage in the cargo rail.
The cargo tie-down rings should be subject 왘 Press locking button 3 on the belt
to equal loads. Make sure to comply with the reel 1 and pull cargo net out in direc-
1 Belt reel tion of arrow.
information provided in the loading instruc-
2 Mounting element
tions (컄 page 266).
3 Locking button
276
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 Place load between the cargo net and i The telescoping rod can be used to tighten Removing rear seat cushions
the side wall of the cargo compart- the load against the rear seats so as to secure it
If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo
ment. from slipping.
management system* you can remove the
왘 Press locking button 3 on belt 왘 Insert one mounting element 2 into rear seat cushions.
reel 1. With the other hand, slowly each cargo rail.
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro-
pull net over load until it is taut. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail vide you with a larger cargo compartment.
to N.
Telescoping rod 왘 Fold the seat cushions forward
왘 Insert telescoping rod 1 into mount- (컄 page 269).
ing element 2.
왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail
until it engages in the ‹ position.
You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
1 Telescoping rod
2 Mounting element Example illustration passenger-side
1 Release lever
2 Plug for seat heating* 컄컄
277
Controls in detail
Loading
278
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box/CD changer* Releasing CD changer*
i Depending on vehicle equipment, a
Warning! G CD changer* and an AUX-socket are located in
the glove box.
279
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing CD changer* Locking and unlocking the glove box 왘 Insert mechanical key into glove box
separately lock.
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 3 to
when the vehicle is in the shop for service. lock the glove box.
왘 Take the mechanical key out of the 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 2 to
SmartKey or SmartKey with unlock the glove box.
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 455).
i The glove box can only be locked or
unlocked with the mechanical key (컄 page 455).
1 CD changer
왘 Gently push CD changer 1 up in direc-
tion of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD changer operation,
see separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box
280
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front center i Depending on vehicle configuration your Storage/telephone* compartment un-
console vehicle may not equipped with an upper storage der front center armrest
compartment.
i Depending on vehicle configuration, the
lower storage compartment contains an ashtray
(컄 page 285).
The cover opens automatically. i The mobile phone cradle* (컄 page 292), the
왘 Briefly press the front of the cover. Roadside Assistance button • (컄 page 298)
and the Information button ¡ (컄 page 299)
The cover opens automatically. are located in the storage/telephone* compart-
ment.
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
282
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell Parcel nets on front seat backrests
A small convenience parcel net is located A small convenience parcel net is located
Warning! G in the front passenger footwell. It is intend-
ed for small and light items, such as road
on each of the front seat backrests. It is in-
tended for small and light items, such as
maps, mail, etc. road maps, mail, etc.
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front passen-
ger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classifi-
cation System OCS (컄 page 79) may not be
able to properly approximate the occupant
weight category.
Parcel nets are intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the 1 Parcel net 1 Parcel net
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
283
Controls in detail
Useful features
284
Controls in detail
Useful features
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear center console ashtray (front of Opening rear ashtray Cigarette lighter
rear seats)
왘 Briefly press ashtray cover 2.
Depending on vehicle configuration your
! Close the ashtray when not in use and be- The ashtray 1 opens automatically. vehicle is equipped with a cigarette lighter
fore folding the rear seats
and an ashtray (컄 page 285) located in the
Removing rear ashtray insert front center console and an ashtray locat-
왘 Grip the insert on the sides and pull it ed in front of the rear seats (컄 page 286).
out upwards.
Warning! G
Reinstalling rear ashtray insert
Never touch the heating element or sides of
왘 Install ashtray insert.
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
왘 Close the ashtray. Hold the knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
Cigarette lighter
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
1 Ashtray
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). with the hot cigarette lighter.
2 Ashtray cover
왘 Push in cigarette lighter. When leaving the vehicle always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
matically when hot.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
286
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). ! The lighter socket can accommodate Power outlets
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum
of 180 W) designed for use with the standard ! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, how- make sure that the maximum current drawn
ever, that connecting accessories to the lighter does not exceed 55 A.
socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit prop- i The power outlets can be used to
erly) can damage the lighter socket. With the accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) posi- of 240 W.
tion, or the lighter may pop out too early with the If the engine is off, the battery may become dis-
lighter not hot enough. charged if used for long periods of time.
1 Cigarette lighter To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec- i You can use the power outlets, except for
왘 Open the ashtray (컄 page 285). trical accessories designed for use with the stan- the power outlet in the front center console,
dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V even if the ignition is switched off.
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
power outlets (컄 page 287) in your vehicle An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto- whenever possible. vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a
matically when hot. minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini-
i If the engine is off, and the cigarette lighter mum level, the power outlets are automatically
is being used extensively, the vehicle battery switched off. This ensures that enough power re-
may become discharged. mains to start the engine.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlets are located 왘 Open cover plate (컄 page 281). Power outlet in rear center console
앫 in the front center console 왘 Pull out cover 1 and insert electrical
(컄 page 288) plug (cigarette lighter type).
앫 in the front passenger footwell i Depending on vehicle configuration, the
(컄 page 288) storage compartment contains an ashtray with
cigarette lighter (컄 page 287) instead.
앫 in the rear center console (컄 page 288)
앫 on the right-hand side of the cargo Power outlet in front passenger
compartment (컄 page 289) footwell
Power outlet in front center console 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
288
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1
(컄 page 289). 1 Retainer pin
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). 2 Eyelet
Before driving off, check that the floormats
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
(cigarette lighter type). essary. A loose floormat could slip and
Removing
hinder proper functioning of the pedals. 왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
Do not place several floormats on top of 왘 Remove the floormat.
each other as this may impair pedal move-
ment. Installing
왘 Lay down the floormat in the respective
i To install or remove the floormat more easi- footwell.
ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 44). 왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
tainer pins 1.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
290
Controls in detail
Useful features
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
292
Controls in detail
Useful features
The mobile phone is linked to the Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle
hands-free device and the multifunc- phone cradle If you require a different cradle for your
tion steering wheel. mobile phone, remove the present cradle
The battery is charged depending on its before installing a new one.
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The Removing an existing mobile phone
charge procedure will be indicated in cradle
the mobile phone’s display.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system
(컄 page 180), the Voice Control System* Example illustration
(see separate operating instructions), or
1 Release catch for mobile phone
the COMAND system (see separate oper-
2 Mobile phone cradle
ating instructions).
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the Example illustration
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis-
mobile phone remains switched on for approxi-
connected. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle
mately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call
during this time, the mobile phone switches off 왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
10 minutes after the call has been completed. arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle
mobile phone cradle 2. 왘 Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing a different mobile phone cra- Tele Aid The Tele Aid system
dle (Telematic Alarm Identification on
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system Demand)
may only be performed by completing the sub-
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance The Tele Aid system consists of three
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete types of response:
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated. 앫 automatic and manual emergency
If you have any questions regarding activation, 앫 roadside assistance
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 앫 information
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
Shortly after the completion of your ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
Example illustration
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive properly connected, not damaged and cel-
1 Contact plate a user ID and password. By visiting lular and GPS coverage is available.
2 Recesses www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
3 Mobile phone cradle (USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted by using the volume control on
왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into information, remote door unlock and the COMAND system or on the multifunc-
recesses 2 of contact plate 1. more. tion steering wheel. To raise, turn the rota-
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward ry volume control on COMAND system
until it engages. clockwise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on
COMAND system control counterclock-
wise or press button ç on the multi-
function steering wheel.
294
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the System self-check
Roadside Assistance button • or COMAND system audio is muted and the select-
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
the Information button ¡, depend- ed mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses. The optional
malfunctions are detected and indicated
ing on the type of response required. cellular phone (if installed) inserted in cradle
switches off. If you must use this phone, we rec- (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
i The SOS button is located in the overhead ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a Roadside Assistance button • and the
control panel (컄 page 33). standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone Information button ¡ stay on longer
The Roadside Assistance button • from the cradle and place the call. The naviga- than 10 seconds or do not come on).
(컄 page 298) and the Information button ¡ tion* system (if engaged) will continue to run.
The display in the instrument cluster is available The message Tele Aid – Inoperative
(컄 page 299) are located below the center arm-
for use, and spoken commands are only avail- appears in the multifunction display.
rest cover.
able by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular system. A pop-up window will appear in the
network for communication and the GPS (Global COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca- Aid call is in progress. After the Tele Aid call has
tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the ended, the optional cellular phone inserted in the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this cradle switches on again. A PIN entry might be
occurs, assistance must be summoned by other necessary.
means.
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
296
Controls in detail
Useful features
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
298
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Information button ¡
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Assistance button • remains illuminated in
The Information button ¡ is located
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to red for approximately 10 seconds during the
system self-check after switching on the ignition below the center armrest cover.
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For (together with the SOS button and the Informa-
tion button ¡).
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside See system self-check (컄 page 295) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
Assistance Manual for more information.
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
The following is only available in the USA: If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
the replacement of a flat tire with the initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable. vant cellular phone network was not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the mul-
1 Information button ¡
tifunction display. 왘 Open the storage compartment
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- (컄 page 282).
ing the t button on the multifunction steer-
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer
ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND
system. than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting Call will appear
in the multifunction display.
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the i The indicator lamp in the Information ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
message Call Connected appears in the button ¡ remains illuminated in red for after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system approximately 10 seconds during the system minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- has detected a malfunction or the service is not
identification number, model, color and lo- er with the SOS button and the Roadside currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
Assistance button •). your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
cation (subject to availability of cellular Center and have the system checked or contact
and GPS signals). See system self-check (컄 page 295) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the
USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as
i While the call is connected, you can change longer than approximately 10 seconds.
possible.
to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV If the indicator lamp in the Information
button on the COMAND system. button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
Call priority
A voice connection between the Customer
established, then the Tele Aid system could not If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance Center representative and the
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel- Assistance call or Information call are
occupants of the vehicle will be estab- lular phone network is not available). The mes-
lished. Information regarding the operation active, an Emergency call is still possible.
sage Call Failed appears in the multifunction
of your vehicle, the nearest display. In this case, the Emergency call will take
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or priority and override all other active calls.
Information calls can be terminated using
Mercedes-Benz USA products and servic- the t button on the multifunction steering i The indicator lamp in the respective button
es is available to you. wheel or the END button on the COMAND sys- flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
tem. calls can only be terminated by a Response
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
Center or Customer Assistance Center repre-
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and sentative, whereas Roadside Assistance and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep- Information calls can also be terminated by
arately) to learn more (USA only). pressing button t on the multifunction
steering wheel or using the END button on the
COMAND system.
300
Controls in detail
Useful features
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
the system does not reset, contact the Response cle via Internet using the ID and password In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or sent to you shortly after the completion of
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz your acquaintance call. 왘 Report the incident to the police.
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer The Response Center will then unlock your The police will issue a numbered
Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. vehicle with the remote door unlocking incident report.
feature. 왘 Pass this number on to the
Remote door unlock Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
i The remote door unlock feature is available
In case you have locked your vehicle unin- if the relevant cellular phone network is avail- with your password issued to you when
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), able. you subscribed to the service.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: The SOS button will flash and the message The Response Center will then attempt
Connecting Call will appear in the multifunc- to covertly contact the vehicle’s
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
command.
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). located, the Response Center will
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center contact the local law enforcement and
You will be asked to provide your pass- specialist may attempt to establish voice contact
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
word which you provided when you with the vehicle occupants.
provided to law enforcement.
completed the subscriber agreement. If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho- If you have any questions, please call the
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the rization was received by the Response Center, Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
tailgate recessed handle for minimum you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail- the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is gate recessed handle again.
flashing. i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
The message Connecting Call ap- to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm
pears in the multifunction display. system (컄 page 106).
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
302
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 2: Step 3:
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. 왘 If you have previously programmed a 왘 Hold end of the hand-held remote
Do not run the engine while programming signal transmitter button and wish to control 5 of the device you wish to
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of retain its programming, proceed to train approximately 2 to 5 in
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. step 3. (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal
All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
If you are programming the integrated
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious- programmed, while keeping the indica-
remote control for the first time, press
ness and possible death. tor lamp 1 in view.
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Step 4:
Programming the integrated remote them only when indicator lamp 1
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
control begins to flash after approximately
press hand-held remote control
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
Step 1: button 6 and the desired signal trans-
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). dure erases any previous settings for
release the buttons until step 5 is com-
all three channels and initializes the
pleted.
memory.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
If you later wish to program a second
and then rapidly.
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
buttons, do not repeat this step and be- first time the signal transmitter button is
gin directly with step 3. programmed. If this button has already been
programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds. 컄컄
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
304
Controls in detail
Useful features
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are programming steps again using that
왘 Select and press the appropriate inte- other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
grated signal transmitter button (2, sure new batteries are in the hand-held
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- 앫 Check the frequency of hand-held remote control before beginning the
trolled device. remote control 5 (typically located on procedure.
The integrated remote control trans- the reverse side of the remote). The in-
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
mitter continues to send the signal as tegrated remote control is compatible
garage door opener assembly. This
long as the button is pressed – up to with radio-frequency devices operating
may help improve transmitting and/or
20 seconds. between 280-390 MHz.
receiving signals.
앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote
Erasing the integrated remote control control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in-
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
memory hood of the hand-held remote control
you should experience further difficulties with
sending a faster and more accurate sig-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). programming the integrated remote control,
nal to the integrated remote control. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer Truck Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer
앫 While performing step 3, hold
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, Assistance Center (in the USA only) at
hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
for approximately 20 seconds, until 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
ent lengths and angles from the signal
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
are programming. Attempt varying
The codes of all three channels are angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in
erased. (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
306
Controls in detail
Useful features
307
Controls in detail
Useful features
308
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
309
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
! Additional instructions for ML 63 AMG:
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads above 4500 rpm in each gear.
(full throttle driving) and excessive 앫 Shift gears at the correct time.
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of 앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
maximum rpm in each gear). (컄 page 194) for the first 1000 miles
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner. (1500 km).
310
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
311
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
cause excessive and premature wear of the
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
Warning! G brake pads. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
It can also result in the brakes overheating, position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake
With the engine not running, there is no thereby significantly reducing their effec- on a brake test dynamometer and such testing
should be no longer than 10 seconds.
power assistance for the brake and steering tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
systems. In this case, it is important to keep vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- Active braking action through the ESP® may
in mind that a considerably higher degree of dent. otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
Limited Warranty.
hicle. ! Operational or performance test must only
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
Brakes
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or vehicle with considerable force prior to
the transfer case which is not covered by the
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
After driving in heavy rain for some time If your brake system is normally only sub-
without applying the brakes or through wa- jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components, sionally test the effectiveness of the
the first braking action may be somewhat re- brakes by applying above-normal braking
duced and increased pedal pressure may be pressure at higher speeds. This will also
necessary to obtain expected braking ef- enhance the grip of the brake pads.
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
312
Operation
Driving instructions
All checks and service work on the brake ! When driving down long and steep grades,
Warning! G system should be carried out by qualified relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
technicians only. Contact an authorized lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
Make sure not to endanger any other road Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
users when carrying out these braking reduces brake pad wear.
maneuvers. Only install brake pads and brake fluid
When using the engine’s braking power, a drive
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. wheel may not spin for an extended period of
time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 100). Warning! G cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may Warranty.
If other than recommended brake pads are
be the reason for low brake fluid in the installed, or other than recommended brake After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
reservoir. fluid is used, the braking properties of the on for some time, rather than immediately
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may vehicle can be degraded to an extent that park, so that the air stream will cool down
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the safe braking is substantially impaired. This the brakes faster.
instrument cluster comes on and an could result in an accident.
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released (컄 page 401).
Observe additional messages in the multi-
function display that may appear
(컄 page 430).
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
313
Operation
Driving instructions
314
Operation
Driving instructions
315
Operation
Driving instructions
컄컄 Hydroplaning
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires the adhesion properties on a wet road are
Depending on the depth of the water layer
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to sharply reduced.
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Depending upon the weather and/or road at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
Center or tire dealer for repairs. surface (conditions), the tire traction varies vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
widely. road and apply brakes cautiously in the
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by rain.
law. These indicators are located in six Specified tire inflation pressures must be
places on the tread circumference and maintained. This applies particularly if the Tire traction
become visible at a tread depth of tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper- The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
point the tire is considered worn and atures). icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
should be replaced.
You should pay particular attention to the
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid Warning! G condition of the road whenever the outside
band across the tread. temperatures are close to the freezing
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects point.
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor driving with a flat tire or driving at high
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be speed with a flat tire will cause excessive If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) heat build-up and possibly a fire. will be substantially reduced. Under such
become visible at approximately 1/16 in weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not For more information, see “Tires and with extreme caution.
allow your tires to wear down to that level. wheels” (컄 page 348).
316
Operation
Driving instructions
317
Operation
Driving instructions
318
Operation
Driving instructions
319
Operation
Driving instructions
320
Operation
Driving instructions
Off-road driving rules ! Observe the following during off-road 앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as al-
driving: lowed by conditions. This helps overcome
앫 Engage the off-road driving program the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces
(컄 page 253) before driving under 앫 Keep doors, tailgate, windows, and the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the
off-road conditions. tilt/sliding sunroof closed whenever driving ground.
off-road.
앫 Vehicles with air suspension program*: 앫 Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
앫 Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain.
Make sure you select a vehicle level interrupts the forward momentum of the
The more uneven, rutty and steeper the ter- vehicle.
(컄 page 255) appropriate to the topo- rain, the lower the speed should be. Drive
graphical conditions. Always make through water slowly at an even speed, 앫 Always drive onto slopes with the engine
sure the vehicle has enough ground avoiding a bow wave. running and the vehicle in gear.
clearance. 앫 Be especially careful when driving in un- 앫 Do not shift automatic transmission to
known territory. It may be necessary to get position N.
앫 Fasten items being carried as securely out of the vehicle and scout the path you in-
as possible (컄 page 266). tend to take. Warning! G
앫 Always navigate gradients with the en- 앫 Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks,
gine on and with the transmission en- holes, tree stumps and ruts. Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
gaged in a gear. Switch on the DSR 앫 Before driving through water, determine its before driving through sand. However, if you
(컄 page 250) to help maintain a preset depth. do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
speed. 앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, pressure (컄 page 359) before continuing
and do not shut off the engine. your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
pressure increases the risk of losing control
of the vehicle and rolling over.
321
Operation
Driving instructions
322
Operation
Driving instructions
Vehicles with air 1 11 2 앫 Shift automatic transmission to i The hill start assist system supports you
suspension pro- position 1 (컄 page 192). when driving uphill.
gram* 앫 Drive slowly. For more information, see “Hill start assist sys-
tem” (컄 page 191).
Raised level 34° 29° 31° 앫 Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive
Highway 29° 22° 27° with moderate engine speeds Traction in steep terrain
1 (max. 3000 rpm).
Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package* The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
앫 Utilize the engine’s braking power 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
when descending a slope, observe the angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the
ML 63 AMG 1 2
engine speed (do not overrev the en- climbing ability of the vehicle depends on
Raised level 28° 29° gine). Apply the service brake as need- terrain conditions.
Highway 23° 24° ed.
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
i For maximum engine speed, see “Instru- continuous wheel traction when driving in
앫 Comply with the warnings ment cluster” (컄 page 26) and see “Engine” steep terrain.
(컄 page 319) and rules for off-road (컄 page 513).
driving (컄 page 321). 앫 Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on
a steep incline when the front wheels have then
앫 Driving on embankments, slopes and grade drive. the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting
other steep inclines should only be towards the rear axle.
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the
Warning! G The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the
torque for the front wheels by braking them.
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb-
ing ability is a 100% grade which is Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is
Never turn the vehicle around on steep increased.
equivalent to a slope angle of inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the
45 degrees. Keep in mind that the vehicle cannot complete the attempted
climbing ability of the vehicle depends climb, back it down in reverse gear.
on terrain conditions.
323
Operation
Driving instructions
324
Operation
Driving instructions
앫 Before driving through water, deter- 앫 Drive through the water slowly and at a Crossing obstacles
mine its depth. constant speed.
! The water depth must not exceed the 앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
respective value listed in the table. The ground water, and do not shut off the engine.
under the water might not be firm which could
result the water being deeper than expected ! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors while
when driving the vehicle through it. Please note driving through water. Water could otherwise en-
that the water level is correspondingly lower for ter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle’s
flowing water. electronics, as well as the interior equipment.
앫 Vehicles with air suspension program*: 앫 There is a very high level of driving re-
Select the highest vehicle level sistance in water. The surface is slip-
possible (컄 page 255). pery and may not be firm, making ! Obstacles can damage the vehicle
pulling away in water difficult and dan- underbody or suspension components. If possi-
앫 Switch to off-road driving program ble use the assistance of a second person out-
gerous.
(컄 page 253) before driving through side the vehicle to scout the path you intend to
water. 앫 Make sure that only small bow waves take and check for adequate ground clearance
are formed when driving the vehicle when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The
앫 Shift automatic transmission to through water. person assisting you outside the vehicle should
position 1 or 2 (컄 page 192). always be a safe distance away from the vehicle
앫 Clean mud off the tire tread after driv- and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
앫 Avoid high engine speeds. ing through water. in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.
앫 Enter and leave the water only at a 앫 To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, in-
shallow spot, driving at walking speed. brake pedal several times while driving spect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle
after leaving the water. underbody and suspension components. Failure
! Never accelerate before driving into the to do so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future
water. The bow wave could force water into the
performance, including increased chance of an
engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging
accident.
them.
325
Operation
Driving instructions
When driving over tree stumps, big rocks Driving on sand 앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
and other obstacles, observe the following conditions permit. This helps overcome
rules:
Warning! G the vehicle rolling resistance and re-
duce the likelihood of the vehicle sink-
앫 Make sure the off-road driving program
ing into the ground.
(컄 page 253) is switched on. Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you 앫 Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they
앫 Avoid high engine speeds.
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation are not too deep and you have suffi-
앫 Shift automatic transmission to pressure (컄 page 359) before continuing cient clearance.
position 1 (컄 page 192). your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
앫 Check the vehicle clearance before pressure increases the risk of losing control Ruts
crossing obstacles. of the vehicle and rolling over.
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
앫 Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or ways have deep ruts which can cause the
When driving on sand, observe the follow- underbody to come in contact with the
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
ing rules: ground.
the front wheels at the center of the ob-
stacle, and repeat same with the rear 앫 Vehicles with air suspension program*: 앫 Make sure the off-road driving program
wheel. Set the raised level (컄 page 255). (컄 page 253) is switched on.
! Special attention is needed when you cross 앫 Avoid high engine speeds. 앫 Vehicles with air suspension program*:
obstacles on a steep incline. Set the raised level (컄 page 255).
앫 Shift automatic transmission into a
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its gear range that is appropriate for the
possible slanted position which in turn may terrain.
result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.
326
Operation
Driving instructions
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient. Otherwise: vehicle.
앫 your vehicle may be damaged Warning! G We recommend that you inspect the vehi-
앫 the underbody of the vehicle may come in cle for possible damage after each off-road
contact with the ground and you may get If you feel a sudden significant vibration or trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-
stuck ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- quent timely repair reduces the chance of
앫 Avoid high engine speeds. ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, a possible breakdown or accident later on.
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
앫 Shift automatic transmission to Proceed as follows:
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
position 1 (컄 page 192). tion to an area which is a safe distance from 앫 Switch off the off-road driving program
앫 Drive next to the ruts rather than the roadway. (컄 page 253).
through them if at all possible. Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for 앫 Switch off the DSR (컄 page 250).
앫 If the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-
앫 Vehicles with air suspension program*:
with one side of the vehicle on the pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Lower the vehicle back to a level
grassy center strip if the route permits. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
suitable for road conditions, e.g. High-
dealer for repairs.
way/High-speed level (컄 page 255).
Damage to the vehicle may influence driving
앫 Clean all exterior lamps and check for
comfort and pose the risk of accident to you
possible damage.
and other drivers.
앫 Clean the front and rear license plate.
327
Operation
Driving instructions
328
Operation
Driving instructions
Electrical connections Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the Loading a trailer
maximum permissible axle weight:
The vehicle is prewired to accept the 앫 When loading a trailer, you should ob-
seven-wire harness included in the serve that neither the permissible GTW,
ML 320 CDI
Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch nor the GVWR are exceeded.
ML 350
receiver kit.
ML 550 Maximum permissible values are listed
i A four-pole conversion plug is available from on the safety compliance certification
Front 3085 lb (1400 kg)
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
Center as a spare part. Rear 3525 lb (1600 kg) to be towed.
For further information, contact an autho- ML 63 AMG The lowest value listed must be select-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ed when determining how the vehicle
Front 3180 lb (1440 kg)
and trailer are loaded.
Rear 3525 lb (1600 kg)
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 앫 The tongue weight at the hitch ball
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is must be added to the GVW to prevent
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the
the maximum permissible vehicle weight: exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow
weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
vehicle’s rear GAWR.
ML 350, ML 550, ML 320 CDI: cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on
6235 lb (2830 kg) the trailer. The maximum permissible i We recommend loading the trailer in such a
gross trailer weight to be towed: manner that it has a Tongue Weight (TW)
ML 63 AMG: 7200 lb (3265 kg) between 8% and 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight
6400 lb (2900 kg) (GTW).
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): maximum permissible weight on the trailer i Maximum trailer weight ratings are calculat-
Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tongue: ed assuming the vehicle, plus driver. The weight
tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, of other accessories, passengers and cargo will
576 lb (261 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It reduce the maximum trailer weight and Tongue
approved hitch receiver. Weight (TW) your vehicle can tow.
must never exceed the GVWR.
329
Operation
Driving instructions
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer Attaching a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
앫 To assure that the tow vehicle and trail-
er are in compliance with the maximum Warning! G Most states and all Canadian provinces
permissible weight limits have the load- require
ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas- Vehicles with air suspension program*:
앫 safety chains between your tow vehicle
sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) While you are coupling or decoupling a
and the trailer.
weighed on a commercial scale. trailer, make sure that you do not
The chains should be criss-crossed
앫 Check the vehicle’s front and rear 앫 lock or unlock
under the trailer tongue. They must be
Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross 앫 open or close attached to the hitch receiver, and not
Trailer Weight (GTW) and Tongue a vehicle door or the tailgate. to the vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Weight (TW). The vehicle’s level could change and you
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
The values as measures must not could endanger yourself and/or others as a
chains to permit turning corners.
exceed the weight limits listed under result.
“Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings” 앫 a separate brake system at various
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
(컄 page 329). trailer weights.
button* (컄 page 255) or the vehicle level
control system* (컄 page 255) when cou- 앫 a break-away switch on trailers with a
pling/decoupling the trailer. separate brake system. Check with
your local state laws for specific
requirements.
The switch activates the trailer brakes
in the possible event that the trailer
might separate from the tow vehicle.
330
Operation
Driving instructions
! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if 왘 Vehicles with air suspension program*: Towing a trailer
trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle’s Set the ADS* to AUTO or COMFORT
There are many different laws, including
hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is (컄 page 255).
equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither speed limit restrictions, having to do with
the vehicle’s brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66). trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le-
function properly. gal, not only for where you reside, but also
왘 Close all doors and the tailgate.
for where you will be driving. A good
i The provided vehicle electrical wiring 왘 Attach the trailer. source for this information can be the po-
harness for trailer towing has a brake signal wire
왘 Plug in all electrical connectors. lice or local authorities.
for hook-up to a brake controller.
Note the following points, when driving
You should consider using a trailer sway control i Vehicles with air suspension program*:
system. For further information, contact an with the trailer:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle level
always remains in the Highway setting. 앫 In order to gain skill and an understand-
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission The following applies additionally when towing a ing of the vehicle’s behavior, you
is set to P (컄 page 185). trailer: should practice turning, stopping and
왘 Set the parking brake for the vehicle 앫 The vehicle is lowered to the highway level backing up in an area which is free from
(컄 page 65). when it reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) traffic.
if not set to highway level. 앫 Before you start driving check the
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 54).
앫 The high-speed level is not available.
앫 trailer hitch
왘 Vehicles with air suspension program*: The restrictions that apply to towing also apply
Set the vehicle level to Highway when using accessories that are connected to 앫 break-away switch
(컄 page 255). the trailer power socket, such as a bicycle rack.
앫 safety chains
앫 electrical connections
앫 lighting and tires
331
Operation
Driving instructions
앫 Adjust the mirrors (컄 page 49) to 앫 The vehicle and trailer combination is 앫 On very steep inclines, not manageable
permit unobstructed view beyond rear heavier, and therefore is limited in ac- with automatic transmission in 1,
of trailer. celeration and climbing ability, and re- switch on off-road driving program
quires longer stopping distances. (컄 page 253).
앫 If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, It is more prone to reacting to cross 앫 When going down a long hill, shift into
and then apply only the trailer brake wind gusts, and requires more sensi- a lower gear and use the engine’s brak-
controller by hand to make sure the tive steering input. ing effect.
brakes are working properly.
앫 If possible, do not brake abruptly, but Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat-
앫 Always secure items in the trailer to rather engage the brake slightly at first ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.
prevent load shifts while driving. to permit the trailer to activate its
앫 If the engine coolant rises to an ex-
brake. Then increase the braking force.
앫 When towing a trailer, check occasion- tremely high temperature (coolant tem-
ally to make sure the load is secure, ! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce perature needle approaching the red
and that lighting and trailer brakes (if the vehicle’s speed immediately. zone) when the air conditioning is on,
so equipped) are functioning properly. In no case attempt to straighten out the tow turn off the air conditioning system.
앫 Take into consideration that when tow- vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed. Engine coolant heat can be additionally
ing a trailer, the handling characteris- 앫 If the transmission repeatedly shifts vented by opening the windows,
tics are different and less stable from between gears on inclines, manually switching the climate control fan speed
those when operating the vehicle with- shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1) to high and setting the temperature
out a trailer. (컄 page 192). control to the maximum hot position.
It is important to avoid sudden maneu- A lower gear and reduction of speed re-
vers. duces the chance of engine overload-
ing and/or overheating.
332
Operation
Driving instructions
333
Operation
Driving instructions
334
Operation
Driving instructions
335
Operation
Driving instructions
336
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling i In case the central locking system does not
Warning! G release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler flap”
(컄 page 457).
Warning! G Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma- fuel system and engine could be damaged.
ble and poisonous. They burn violently and In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
can cause serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- ! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with
rials near gasoline or diesel fuel! diesel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel ! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel
tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth-
suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. 1 Fuel filler flap
ing contact, extinguish all smoking materi- Otherwise, particles from the fuel container
als.
2 Fuel filler cap
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-
Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel tion system. 왘 Turn off the engine.
fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel The fuel filler flap is located on the 왘 Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
fuel vapors are damaging to your health. right-hand side of the vehicle towards the SmartKey from the starter switch.
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with driver’s door (this puts the starter
KEYLESS-GO* automatically switch in position 0, same as with the
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. SmartKey removed from the starter
switch). The driver’s door then can be
closed again. 컄컄
337
Operation
At the gas station
338
Operation
At the gas station
i Diesel engine: Low outside temperatures Check regularly and before a long trip
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is (diesel engine)
empty, the fuel system needs to be bled 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 341).
(컄 page 488). To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is of-
! Diesel engine: fered in the winter months. Check with
The engine is more susceptible to wear and your fuel retailer.
damage if you use
앫 marine diesel fuel ! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
앫 heating oil fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-
앫 additives aged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be
seriously damaged if you use
앫 LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL Example illustration ML 320 CDI (ML 350,
(500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar)
앫 any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of 1 Brake fluid
above 15 ppm 2 Coolant level
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or 3 Windshield washer system and
special additives is not covered by the headlamp cleaning system*
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 343).
339
Operation
At the gas station
For more information, see “Coolant level” For more information, see “Exterior lamp
(컄 page 345) and see “Fuels, coolants, lu- switch” (컄 page 135).
bricants” (컄 page 522).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 359).
340
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood
Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open Vehicles with gasoline engine:
– even when the engine is turned off. The engine is equipped with a transistorized
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To ignition system. Because of the high voltage
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, let the engine cool off com- it is dangerous to touch any components
be forced open by passing air flow. pletely before touching any components on (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety tic socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others. precautions. 앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine
Opening 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
Warning! G turned manually
Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine is running.
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature display indicates that the engine is The radiator fan may continue to run for
overheated, do not open the hood. Move approximately 30 seconds or may even
away from vehicle and do not open the hood restart after the engine has been turned off.
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, Stay clear of fan blades.
call the fire department.
341
Operation
Engine compartment
342
Operation
Engine compartment
343
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 341). For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” section (컄 page 522) and
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1.
(컄 page 525).
왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the Adding engine oil
dipstick guide tube. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after required for vehicles with Maintenance System.
approximately 3 seconds to obtain For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service
accurate reading. Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
The oil level is correct when it is be- literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Example illustration ML 320 CDI (ML 350,
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ML 550 similar)
tween lower mark 3 (min.) and upper
mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification 1 Filler cap
other than those expressly required for the
i All models (except ML 63 AMG): Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil
The filling quantity between the upper and lower filter at change intervals longer than those called
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately for by the Maintenance System will result in
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). engine or emission control system damage not
ML 63 AMG: covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The filling quantity between the upper and lower Warranty.
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
왘 If necessary, add engine oil
(컄 page 344).
ML 63 AMG
1 Filler cap
344
Operation
Engine compartment
345
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on 왘 Continue turning cap 1 counterclock- Windshield/rear window washer
the driver’s side of the engine compart- wise and remove it. system and headlamp cleaning
ment. system*
Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:
앫 for cold coolant: reaches the top of The windshield washer reservoir is located
indicator wall 3 visible through the in the engine compartment.
filling opening
앫 for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘 Add coolant as required.
왘 Replace and tighten cap 1.
For more information on coolant, see
1 Cap “Coolants” (컄 page 528).
2 Coolant expansion tank
3 Indicator wall
4 Coolant level 1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir
왘 Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx- Fluid for the windshield/rear window
imately one half turn counterclockwise washer system and the headlamp cleaning
to release any excess pressure. system* is supplied from the windshield
washer reservoir. It has a capacity of 8.1
US qt (7.7 l).
346
Operation
Engine compartment
During all seasons, add MB Windshield 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid and water (or commercially available
in a suitable container. premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
Warning! G temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- where temperatures may fall below freezing
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite the washer system/reservoir.
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
왘 Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards. damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 530).
347
Operation
Tires and wheels
348
Operation
Tires and wheels
349
Operation
Tires and wheels
350
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle 2) The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- Two labels on your vehicle show how much the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
mance. To benefit, however, you must Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
1) The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction placard can be found on the driver’s weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
specified. fuel and cargo. The certification label
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number also tells you about the front and rear
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and axle weight capacity, called the Gross
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
the vehicle. It also contains information is the total allowable weight that can be
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended carried by a single axle (front or rear).
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi- Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle. either the front axle or rear axle.
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
351
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or 1 Load limit information on the Tire and
brake failure. Loading Information placard
The Tire and Loading Information placard
Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is
located on the driver’s door B-pillar
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information (컄 page 352).
placard example are for illustration purposes
only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle 왘 Locate the statement “The combined
and may vary from data shown in the illustration weight of occupants and cargo should
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information never exceed XXX kilograms or
1 Driver’s door B-pillar placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
Following is a discussion on how to work vehicle.
mation placard.
with the information contained on the Tire
The combined weight of all occupants,
and Loading Information placard with
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
regards to loading your vehicle.
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
352
Operation
Tires and wheels
353
Operation
Tires and wheels
354
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants placard minus combined weight of
pants and passengers) all occupants)
cargo from
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
355
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 356) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
(컄 page 356) as to not exceed the permis- GVWR. trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for ei- between 8% and 15% of the trailer weight
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
ther the front or rear axle. You can obtain and everything loaded in it.
ceed the maximum permissible weight
the GVWR and GAWR from the certification
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear For more information on trailer tongue
label. The certification label can be found
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including load, see “Loading a trailer” (컄 page 329).
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if
data” (컄 page 507).
applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on
a suitable commercial scale.
356
Operation
Tires and wheels
357
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information Important notes on tire inflation If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
placard example are for illustration purposes pressure inflation pressure label on the inside of the
only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and fuel filler flap, contact an authorized
may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
proper tire inflation pressure.
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle. If the tire inflation pressure drops i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
repeatedly: tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
앫 Check the tires for punctures from
on the tire inflation pressure label located on the
foreign objects.
inside of the fuel filler flap.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
1 Tire and Loading Information placard loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, cle condition. If such information is provid-
with recommended cold tire inflation
where it is legal and conditions allow, ed, it can be found on the tire inflation
pressures
consult the tire inflation pressure label on pressure label located on the inside of the
The Tire and Loading Information placard the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available) fuel filler flap (컄 page 337).
lists the recommended cold tire inflation on how to adjust the cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle pressure. If you do not adjust the tire infla-
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed tion pressure, excessive heat can build up
apply to the tires installed as original and result in sudden tire failure.
equipment.
358
Operation
Tires and wheels
359
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in- Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Warning! G
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Tire Pressure Check Tires,
왘 Install the valve cap. tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un-
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. derinflated. You should stop and check your
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat-
see a corresponding warning message in ed on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
the multifunction display. Information placard or, if available, on the
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a sig-
restricted manner or with a delay nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un-
앫 if snow chains are mounted to the
derinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
vehicle
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
앫 in presence of ice and snow handling and stopping ability. Each tire, in-
앫 if you are driving on a loose surface cluding the spare, should be checked
(e.g. sand or gravel) monthly when cold and set to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure as specified
앫 if you are driving in a very sporty on the Tire and Loading Information placard
manner (involving rapid acceleration or on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 352) or,
high speeds in curves) if available, on the tire inflation pressure la-
bel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(컄 page 337).
360
Operation
Tires and wheels
Restarting the Run Flat Indicator 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Warning! G The Run flat indicator must be restarted in Make sure the standard display menu
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a the following situations: appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 147).
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- pressure 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
sure according to the Tire and Loading until the following message appears in
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
Information placard on the driver’s door the multifunction display:
B-pillar (컄 page 352) or, if available, on the 앫 If you have installed new wheels or
tire inflation pressure label located on the tires
inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 337). 왘 Using the Tire and Loading Information
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or,
regular checks of the tire inflation pressures if available, the tire inflation pressure
since a gradual pressure loss in more than label on the inside of the fuel filler flap,
one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat make sure the tire inflation pressure of 왘 Press the reset button on the instru-
Indicator. all four tires is correct. ment cluster (컄 page 145).
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a The following message will appear in
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of Warning! G the multifunction display:
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout Restart
caused by a foreign object). In this case The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in Run Flat Indicator?
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- a reliable manner if you have set the correct Yes
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering tire inflation pressures for each tire. Cancel
maneuvers. If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
361
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation: Checking tire pressure electronically i This device complies with Part 15 of the
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
왘 Press button æ.
System (TPMS), (USA only) two conditions:
The following message will appear in (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
the multifunction display: i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System ence, and
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
Run Flat Indicator (2) this device must accept any interference
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
Restarted instrument cluster (컄 page 27). Depending on received, including interference that may
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire cause undesired operation.
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val- pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS Any unauthorized modification to this device
system itself: could void the user’s authority to operate the
ues for all four tires.
앫 If the telltale illuminates continuously, equipment.
If you wish to cancel activation: one or more of your tires is significantly
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
왘 Press button ç. underinflated. There is no malfunction in the
TPMS. are equipped with the proper electronic
or sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
앫 If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
왘 Wait until the message
itself is not operating properly. tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
Restart
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
Run Flat Indicator?
tires.
Yes
Cancel
disappears.
362
Operation
Tires and wheels
363
Operation
Tires and wheels
364
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire in- 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 145). Checking tire pressure electronically
flation pressure to the inflation pressure recom- with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni-
The following message will appear in
mended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire toring System (Advanced TPMS)*,
pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. the multifunction display:
(Canada only)
Observe the recommended tire inflation pres- Restart tire
sure on the Tire and Loading Information placard pressure monitor? i This device complies with RSS-210 of Indus-
on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 352). Some try Canada. Operation is subject to the following
왘 Press button æ.
vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation two conditions:
pressure information for driving at high speeds The following message will appear in (1) This device may not cause interference, and
(컄 page 358) or for vehicle loads less than the the multifunction display:
maximum loaded vehicle condition (2) this device must accept any interference
Tire Pressure Monitor received, including interference that may
(컄 page 358). If such information is provided, it
Restarted cause undesired operation of the device.
can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
After driving a few minutes the system Any unauthorized modification to this device
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
verifies that the current tire inflation could void the user’s authority to operate the
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- pressures are within the system’s equipment.
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly specified range. Afterwards the current The TPMS only functions on wheels that
until the standard display menu ap- tire inflation pressures are accepted as are equipped with the proper electronic
pears in the multifunction display reference pressures and then moni- sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
(컄 page 147). tored. sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly If you wish to cancel activation: tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
until you see the following message: decrease in pressure in one or more of the
왘 Press button ç.
Tire Pressure Monitor tires.
Active Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
Menu: R-Button multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
365
Operation
Tires and wheels
366
Operation
Tires and wheels
367
Operation
Tires and wheels
Restarting Advanced TPMS* If you want to set new reference values 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
The TPMS usually recognizes new refer- manually: tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
ence values automatically, for example 왘 Using the Tire and Loading Information
appears in the multifunction display
when you have placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 147).
(컄 page 352) or, if available, the sup-
앫 adjusted the tire inflation pressure
plemental tire inflation pressure 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 changed wheels or tires information on the inside of the fuel until
앫 mounted new wheels or tires filler flap (컄 page 337), make sure the
앫 the current inflation pressures for
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
each tire appear in the multifunc-
correct.
Warning! G tion display
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire or
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended for the vehicle operating condition. 앫 the following message appears in
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold the multifunction display
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You pressure on the Tire and Loading Information Tire pressure
might lose control over the vehicle. placard on the driver’s door B-pillar displayed after
(컄 page 352). Some vehicles may have supple- driving for
mental tire inflation pressure information for a few minutes.
driving at high speeds (컄 page 358) or for vehi-
cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 145).
condition (컄 page 358). If such information is The following message will appear in
provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
the multifunction display:
filler flap.
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
368
Operation
Tires and wheels
369
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed
(컄 page 377) rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings (컄 page 374)
can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 376)
Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires: (컄 page 376)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 379)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 370)
8 Load identification (컄 page 374)
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 3 Radial tire code
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
5 Tire load rating
(컄 page 515). 6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
370
Operation
Tires and wheels
371
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 370) and Tire
Warning! G rating, see “Load identification” speed rating 6 (컄 page 370) are also referred
(컄 page 374). to as “service description”.
The tire load rating must always be at least
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 370) and Tire Summer tires
half of the GAWR (컄 page 380) of your
vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the speed rating 6 (컄 page 370) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Index Speed rating
result which may cause an accident and/or
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
serious personal injury to you or others.
Tire speed rating R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 370) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
shown on the original part. indicates the approved maximum speed
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
for the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
372
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any If a service description 5 and 6 All-season and winter tires
tire with a speed capability above (컄 page 370) is given, the speed capa-
Index Speed rating
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a bility is limited by the speed symbol in
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam- the service description. Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. T M+S 1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
maximum speed capability of the tire, In this example, “97Y” is the service 1
the service description for the tire must description. The letter “Y” designates H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
be referred to. The service description the speed rating and the speed capabil- V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
is comprised of the tire load rating 5 ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 1 or M+S.for winter tires
(컄 page 370) and the tire speed (300 km/h).
rating 6 (컄 page 370).
앫 Any tire with a speed capability above i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
designation and no service “ZR” in the size designation AND the show M+S and the
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 370) is service description must be placed in mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction
given, the tire manufacturer must be parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
performance requirements of the Rubber Manu-
consulted for the maximum speed ca- (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren- facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
pability. thesis designates the maximum speed Association of Canada (RAC) and have been
capability of the tire as being above designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
373
Operation
Tires and wheels
Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
identification 1 may be molded into the
tire sidewall following the letter designat- U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
ing the tire speed rating (컄 page 370). manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
No specification given: absence of any text
produced.
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire. The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
purchasers in recall situations or other
(or reinforced) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
Light Load: designates a light load tire. purchasers the means to easily identify
1 Load identification C, D, E: designates load range associated such tires.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data a specified pressure.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
from data shown in above illustration. code” and “Date of manufacture”.
374
Operation
Tires and wheels
375
Operation
Tires and wheels
376
Operation
Tires and wheels
Always follow the recommended tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Quality grades can be found, where appli-
inflation pressure (컄 page 357) for proper (U.S. vehicles) cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
tire inflation. shoulder and maximum section width. For
Tire manufacturers are required to grade example:
tires based on three performance factors:
Warning! G treadwear, traction and Treadwear Traction Temperature
temperature resistance. 200 AA A
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. All passenger car tires must conform to
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires federal safety requirements in addition to
wear excessively and/or unevenly, these grades.
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- 1 Treadwear
tance, and result in sudden deflation 2 Traction
(blowout) because they are more likely to 3 Temperature resistance
become punctured or damaged by road de-
bris, potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
377
Operation
Tires and wheels
378
Operation
Tires and wheels
379
Operation
Tires and wheels
380
Operation
Tires and wheels
381
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply composition and material used Tread Vehicle maximum load on the tire
This indicates the number of plies or the The portion of a tire that comes into Load on an individual tire that is
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in contact with the road. determined by distributing to each axle its
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac- share of the maximum loaded vehicle
turers also must indicate the ply materials Treadwear indicators weight and dividing it by two.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
Narrow bands, sometimes called
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Rotating tires
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
remains.
Warning! G
speed range for which a tire is approved. TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
Maximum permissible weight on trailer of the same dimension.
Total load limit
tongue. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
Rated cargo and luggage load plus tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards rear), tire rotation is not possible.
designated seating capacity.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Traction
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are with tires of the same dimension all
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road determined by tire manufacturers using around. If your vehicle is equipped with
via the tires. The amount of grip provided. government testing procedures. The tires of the same dimension all around,
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tires can be rotated, observing a
tire. front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 351).
382
Operation
Tires and wheels
383
Operation
Winter driving
384
Operation
Winter driving
385
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Starting approximately 1 month before the
your vehicle serviced by an authorized next maintenance service is due, one of
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in the following messages will appear in the
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet multifunction display while you are driving
at the times called for by the maintenance or when you switch on the ignition (exam-
service indicator display. ple service A):
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A In XXXXX Miles (Km) Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and Service A In XXX Days of maintenance services and intervals they
maintenance service indicator at the designated Service A In X Day need to be performed at.
times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not Service A Due Now
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited i The Maintenance System in your vehicle
Warranty. The maintenance services will be indicated tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
by showing a service type A through type H since the last maintenance service and calcu-
Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display. Types A lates other maintenance service work required.
message through H are classified based on estimat-
ed time needed to perform the mainte-
The maintenance service indicator nance service, ranging:
message will notify you when the next from Service A
maintenance service is due.
(approximately 1 hour)
to Service H
(approximately 8 hours)
386
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service You can also clear it yourself: Maintenance service term exceeded
indicator message If you have exceeded the suggested main-
The maintenance service indicator mes- tenance service term, you will see the fol-
sage is automatically cleared lowing message in the multifunction
display:
앫 after approximately 10 seconds when
you switch on the ignition or when Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles (Km)
reaching the maintenance service Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
threshold while driving Service A Exceeded By X Day
앫 after approximately 30 seconds, once In addition, a signal sounds when the
the suggested maintenance service message appears.
term has passed 1 Reset button
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
왘 Press reset button 1 on the instru- Center will reset the maintenance service
ment cluster. indicator following a completed mainte-
The maintenance service indicator nance service.
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 154).
387
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service To arrive at the true maintenance service dead- ! If the maintenance service indicator was
indicator display line, you will need to subtract these days from inadvertently reset, have an authorized
the days shown in the maintenance service indi- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.
You can call up the maintenance service in- cator message or maintenance service indicator
display. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
dicator display at any time to check when been performed. Resetting the system without
the next maintenance service is due. Do not confuse the maintenance service indica- performing the proper service as called for by
tor with the engine oil level indicator N. the maintenance service indicator will result in
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- Resetting the maintenance service covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly indicator Warranty.
until the standard display appears in
In the event that the maintenance service
the multifunction display (컄 page 154).
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
왘 Press button k or j until the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
maintenance service indicator display Center, you can have the maintenance
with the service symbol 9 and the service indicator reset. The automotive
service deadline appears in the multi- maintenance facility carrying out the
function display. maintenance service will find the informa-
tion for resetting the maintenance service
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the count indicator in the maintenance-relevant
shown by the maintenance service indicator. information for your vehicle. Such informa-
tion is available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or di-
rectly from Mercedes-Benz.
388
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle While in operation, even while parked, your Frequent washing reduces and/or
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- eliminates the aggressiveness and
Regular and proper care will help to fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- potency of the above adverse influences.
maintain the value of your vehicle. The tack the paintwork as well as the
More frequent washings are necessary to
best way to protect your vehicle from underbody and cause lasting damage.
deal with unfavorable conditions:
harmful environmental influences is to
Such damage is caused not only by
wash it and use protective treatments 앫 near the ocean
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
regularly. 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
but also by:
emissions)
앫
Warning! G Air pollution
앫 during winter operation
앫 Road salt
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. You should check your vehicle from time to
앫 Tar
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. time for stone chipping or other damage.
Always follow the instructions on the partic- 앫 Gravel and stone chipping Any damage should be repaired as soon as
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s possible to prevent corrosion.
To avoid paint damage, you should
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. immediately remove: In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
앫 Grease and oil
signed for cleaning your vehicle. ough check is a washing of the underbody
앫 Fuel followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children. 앫 Coolant aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
앫 Brake fluid
앫 Bird droppings
앫 Insects
앫 Tree resins, etc.
389
Operation
Vehicle care
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto- The following topics deal with the cleaning Tar stains
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body and care of your vehicle and give important Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
cavities which will last for the lifetime of “how-to” information as well as references and become more difficult to remove. A tar
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care remover is recommended.
neither necessary nor recommended by products.
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility Paintwork, painted body components
of incompatibility between materials used Power washer
in the production process and others ap- ! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar
plied later. ! Follow the instructions provided by the materials to painted body components may
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a damage the paintwork.
We have selected car-care products and distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
compiled recommendations which are the power washer. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology. The intense jet of water can result in damage to paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved the tire. normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
car-care products at an authorized Always replace a damaged tire. depending on the climate and washing
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Always keep the jet of water moving across the
detergent used.
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber should be applied if the paint surface
damage due to negligent or incorrect care parts.
cannot always be removed or repaired with shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
the car-care products recommended here. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss).
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Center.
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
390
Operation
Vehicle care
Do not apply any of these products or wax Vehicle washing 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces fused jet of water.
hood is still hot. of road salt as soon as possible. Direct only a very weak spray towards
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up the ventilation intake.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
not forget to clean the inner sides of the 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
wheels. sponge and chamois frequently.
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
Engine cleaning If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and dry with a chamois.
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
make sure to protect electrical compo- mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently the finish.
nents and connectors from the intrusion of locked or unlocked.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
water and cleaning agents.
Hand-wash Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
Corrosion protection, such as non-sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
to the engine compartment after every en- in direct sunlight. cloth or sponge.
gine cleaning. Before applying, all control 왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent, Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
linkage bushings and joints should be lu- such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
bricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys Shampoo.
should be protected from any wax.
391
Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash When taking the vehicle through an auto- Vehicles with SmartKey:
matic conveyor type car wash, observe the
You can have your car washed in an auto- 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the
following instructions.
matic car wash from the start. Automatic ignition switched on shift the automatic
car washes without brushes are prefera- transmission to neutral position N.
ble. Warning! G 왘 If engaged, release the parking brake
왘 To protect the filter system, switch the (컄 page 57).
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey
climate control system (컄 page 206) or
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
the automatic climate control system*
not leave children unattended in the vehicle. SmartKey in the starter switch.
(컄 page 220) to air recirculation mode.
It is possible for children to switch on the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic ignition which could result in unsupervised
touchless car wash which use caustic spray. use of vehicle equipment. 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
paint or ornamental moldings. could result in an accident and/or serious 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it personal injury. automatic transmission to park
before running it through the automatic position P.
car wash.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
is set to 0 (컄 page 61). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
button from the starter switch
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle (컄 page 41).
damage. 왘 Insert the SmartKey with
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent 왘 Switch on the ignition.
damage to the mirrors. 왘 Depress the brake pedal.
392
Operation
Vehicle care
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to Ornamental moldings Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
neutral position N. For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
side markers, turn signal lenses
왘 Release the brake pedal. tal moldings, use a damp cloth. 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
왘 If engaged, release the parking brake ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental poo, with plenty of water.
(컄 page 57). moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the anodized aluminum that will be damaged when suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
starter switch. damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings. the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
i After running the vehicle through an auto- that contain solvents.
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind- are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean-
shield (컄 page 395). This will prevent smears er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by chrome-plated, contact an authorized non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
residual wax on the windshield. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the cloth or sponge.
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
vibrate. surface.
393
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Parktronic* system ! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens*
sensors covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
394
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not clean the camera and the area Cleaning the windows and the wiper 왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
around the camera: blades dow cleaning solution on all outside
앫 with a high-pressure cleaner and inside glass surfaces.
앫 with a dry cloth and high pressure Warning! G An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
앫 with aggressive cleaning agents mended.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
You could otherwise damage the camera.
move SmartKey from starter switch ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
vehicle’s on-board electronics have start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the back. If released, the force of the impact from
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
cause injury.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con-
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
engage. front, rear or side windows and the power
tilt/sliding sunroof or rear panorama roof with
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring.
could tear. Doing so may damage the windows.
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
395
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels Plastic and rubber parts ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on
these parts.
If possible, clean wheels once a week. 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
washing solution.
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
spray of water for cleaning the light al- 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a cloth or sponge.
loy wheels. lukewarm solution. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid The surface may temporarily change
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry. Hard plastic trim items
! The vehicle should not be parked for an ex- 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
tended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims Warning! G Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. with light pressure.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. ! Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
the wheel paint if the car is not driven after the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol- Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system vents will make the surface porous and vehi- cloth or sponge.
should always be warmed-up before it is parked cle occupants could suffer serious injuries Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle from plastic parts coming loose in the event surface.
for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. of air bag deployment.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
396
Operation
Vehicle care
397
Operation
Vehicle care
398
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only)
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
399
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the
If any of the following lamps in the instru- ignition, have the respective bulb checked
ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary.
400
Practical hints
What to do if …
401
Practical hints
What to do if …
402
Practical hints
What to do if …
403
Practical hints
What to do if …
404
Practical hints
What to do if …
405
Practical hints
What to do if …
406
Practical hints
What to do if …
407
Practical hints
What to do if …
408
Practical hints
What to do if …
409
Practical hints
What to do if …
410
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
411
Practical hints
What to do if …
412
Practical hints
What to do if …
413
Practical hints
What to do if …
i Switching on the ignition causes all On the pages that follow, you will find a
Warning! G instrument cluster lamps (except high beam compilation of the most important warning
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal and malfunction messages that may
No messages will be displayed if either the indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the appear in the multifunction display.
instrument cluster or the multifunction multifunction display to come on. Make sure the
display is inoperative. lamps and multifunction display are in working For your convenience the messages are
order before starting your journey. divided into two sections:
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such 앫 Text messages (컄 page 415)
as speed or outside temperature, warn- 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 427)
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
414
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
415
Practical hints
What to do if …
416
Practical hints
What to do if …
417
Practical hints
What to do if …
418
Practical hints
What to do if …
419
Practical hints
What to do if …
420
Practical hints
What to do if …
421
Practical hints
What to do if …
422
Practical hints
What to do if …
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind
or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that
an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front
passenger seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
on the ignition (컄 page 40).
(Continued on next page)
423
Practical hints
What to do if …
424
Practical hints
What to do if …
425
Practical hints
What to do if …
426
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
427
Practical hints
What to do if …
428
Practical hints
What to do if …
429
Practical hints
What to do if …
430
Practical hints
What to do if …
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with
this message displayed. Doing so could
result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
ed Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
431
Practical hints
What to do if …
432
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
433
Practical hints
What to do if …
When the message Check engine oil For information on approved engine oils,
level at next refueling. appears while refer to the Factory Approved Service
the engine is running and at operating tem- Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
perature, the engine oil level has dropped an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
to approximately the minimum level. Center.
When this occurs, the warning will first ! The engine oil level warning should not be
come on intermittently and then stay on if ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-
the oil level drops further. played could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil Limited Warranty.
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should
be topped to the required level with an
approved engine oil.
434
Practical hints
What to do if …
435
Practical hints
What to do if …
436
Practical hints
What to do if …
437
Practical hints
What to do if …
438
Practical hints
What to do if …
439
Practical hints
What to do if …
440
Practical hints
What to do if …
441
Practical hints
What to do if …
442
Practical hints
What to do if …
443
Practical hints
What to do if …
444
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
445
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
446
Practical hints
What to do if …
! When the message Compressor Cooling ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached, so The selected level will be set once the compres-
Down appears in the multifunction display, you can damage the underbody of the vehicle. sor has cooled.
driving is still possible. Keep in mind that the
447
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
i Check expiration dates and contents for The vehicle tool kit is stored under the
completeness at least once a year and replace cargo compartment floor.
missing/expired items.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s
앫 Towing eye bolt
side in the cargo compartment behind the
cover. 앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack 1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
2 Handle cover
앫 Fuse chart
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119).
앫 Collapsible wheel chock
왘 Push in handle cover 2 and pull han-
앫 Wheel bolts for spare wheel
dle in direction of arrow.
왘 Lift cargo compartment floor 1.
448
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
449
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
1
Depending on production date, your vehicle may
be equipped with a scissors-type vehicle jack.
Thus, appearance and alignment of the items may
vary.
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type
vehicle jack, a reversible ratchet is also included.
450
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Operational position
Storage position 1 Scissors-type vehicle jack
왘 Turn crank handle in the direction of 2 Reversible ratchet
arrow as far as it will go. 왘 Attach reversible ratchet 2 to vehicle
jack in such a way that the word UP
can be seen.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor-
age compartment:
Storage position
앫 It should be fully collapsed (storage
왘 Take the reversible ratchet out of the position).
vehicle tool kit.
앫 The ratchet must be removed.
Operational position
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.
451
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1. Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG)
The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad- 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
ditionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the Warning! G
way into the openings of base plate 3.
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
For information on where to place wheel
different from those of the road wheels. As
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
ing the vehicle” (컄 page 479).
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
ingly.
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
only. When driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
Minispare wheel replaced with a regular
1 Tilt the plate upward road wheel.
2 Fold the lower plate outward
Never operate the vehicle with more than
3 Insert the plate
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
Minispare wheel is mounted.
452
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
The Minispare wheel is located underneath i Remove Minispare wheel to gain access to Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only)
the cargo compartment floor remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 448). (컄 page 448).
For access the Minispare wheel, see “Vehi- Warning! G
i For information on how to mount the
Minispare wheel, see “Mounting the spare cle tool kit” (컄 page 448).
The dimensions of the collapsible tire are
wheel” (컄 page 479).
왘 Loosen retaining screw 1 by turning it different from those of the road wheels. As
counterclockwise. a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
Removing Minispare wheel
왘 Remove storage well casing 2. change when driving with a collapsible tire
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
왘 Remove Minispare wheel 3. ingly.
The collapsible tire is for temporary use
only. When driving with a collapsible tire
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
1 Retaining screw collapsible tire replaced with a regular road
2 Storage well casing wheel.
3 Minispare wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than
one collapsible tire mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
collapsible tire is mounted.
453
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
The collapsible tire is located underneath i Remove collapsible tire to gain access to
the cargo compartment floor remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 448). (컄 page 448).
i For information on how to mount the For access the collapsible tire, see “Vehi-
collapsible tire, see “Mounting the spare wheel” cle tool kit” (컄 page 448).
(컄 page 479).
왘 Remove the vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 3.
Removing the collapsible tire
7 Retaining screw
1 Electric air pump
2 Collapsible tire 왘 Loosen retaining screw 7 by turning it
3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing counterclockwise.
4 Alignment bolt 왘 Remove collapsible tire 2.
5 Towing eye bolt
6 Wheel wrench
454
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
455
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle 왘 Exit the vehicle. If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked
and opened using the Œ button on the
왘 Close the driver’s door.
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* function,
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the vehi- 왘 Enter the vehicle through the rear left use the emergency release lever to unlock
cle carrying out the following steps. door. and open the tailgate.
왘 Close the front passenger door, the 왘 Press down the locking knob of the The emergency release lever is located on
rear right door and the tailgate. driver’s door. the inside of the tailgate.
왘 Open the driver’s door and the rear left ! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure
door. to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with
왘 Press the central locking switch on the the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.
driver’s door (컄 page 126).
왘 Exit the vehicle.
The locking knobs of the front passen-
ger door and the rear doors move 왘 Close the rear left door.
down. The vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
drained: alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
1 Emergency release lever
왘 Press down the locking knobs of 2 Cover
the front passenger door and the Unlocking and opening the tailgate
왘 Remove cover 2 from the trim on the
rear doors manually.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft tailgate.
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. 왘 Push release lever 1 all the way to the
left.
왘 Lift the tailgate.
456
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
457
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
458
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왘 Repeat this procedure on the active Vehicles with Rear seat entertainment
head restraint for the second front system*
seat.
왘 Take the reset tool out of the
For information on active head restraints,
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 88).
pouch.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
1 Reset tool
2 Active head restraint
3 Rectangular opening
왘 Guide reset tool 1 into rectangular
opening 3 of active head restraint 2.
1 Reset tool 왘 Press reset tool 1 downward in
2 Active head restraint direction of arrow until you hear the
head restraint release mechanism
audibly disengage.
왘 Pull out reset tool 1. 컄컄
459
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
460
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the i When inserting the batteries, make sure
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis- they are clean and free of lint.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. The required replacement batteries are available
at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
461
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
462
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid- when the following lamps malfunction:
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights 앫 Turn signal lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- on should clear up the fogging.
앫 Brake lamps
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all 앫 Parking lamps
times. 앫 Tail lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely Read and observe the messages in the multi-
important. Have headlamps checked and function display (컄 page 438).
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
headlamp adjustment.
463
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
464
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the additional turn signal lamps in the
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang- 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
ing a bulb. exterior rear view mirrors
to prevent short circuits.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 the high mounted brake lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs. 앫 the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
A bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease. light*
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a an autho-
Wear eye and hand protection. rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the i Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a
technically complex process. For your conve-
lamp and its components. We recommend nience, we recommend that you have this work
that you have such work done by a qualified carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
technician. Light Truck Center.
Have the headlamp adjustment checked
regularly.
465
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
466
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Bi-Xenon* low beam/high beam High beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
headlamp
왘 Remove cover 1.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.
Warning! G
왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the
headlamp housing. Do not remove the low beam/high beam
왘 Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because
socket 2. of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is danger-
ous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
왘 Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb and its components. We recommend that
socket 2. you have such work done by a qualified
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the technician. 1 High beam headlamp cover
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-
es.
467
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Remove cover 1. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 (컄 page 466)
counterclockwise.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.
왘 Pull bulb socket 3 out of the
왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the
headlamp housing.
headlamp housing.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
왘 Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert the new bulb into bulb
socket 3.
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert bulb socket 3 into the
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp headlamp housing.
headlamp housing. 왘 Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it 왘 Pull bulb socket 1 out of the
engages. headlamp housing.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the 왘 Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
headlamp housing. socket 1.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag- 왘 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
es. socket 1.
왘 Insert bulb socket 1 into the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 1 clockwise until it
engages.
468
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb Front fog lamp bulbs 왘 Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriv-
er) at point indicated by the arrow and
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 (컄 page 466) ! If not done carefully and properly, damage pry out cover 1.
counterclockwise. to the bumper can result. We therefore recom-
mend that you have this work carried out by an Cover 1 is released.
왘 Pull bulb socket 5 out of the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
headlamp housing. 왘 Swing cover 1 outwards and take it
Removing front fog lamp cover: off.
왘 Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb
socket 5. Removing front fog lamp cover (Vehicles
with AMG Sport Package* or ML 63 AMG):
왘 Insert the new side marker bulb into
bulb socket 5.
왘 Insert bulb socket 5 into the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
engages.
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp
왘 Use a suitable object (e.g. hook or a
screwdriver) and place the hook or
screwdriver carefully between lower
end of cover and bumper. 컄컄
469
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄 왘 Turn the hook or screwdriver 90°. 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Hold the cover 1 and pull the hook or
screwdriver outwards. 왘 Plug in the electrical connector.
You can now access the front fog lamp. 왘 Insert front fog lamp 2 back into
bumper.
왘 Fasten retaining screws 3.
왘 Reinsert cover 1 and press it in until it
engages.
4 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb
Additional turn signal lamps bulbs
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise.
The additional turn signal lamps in the
왘 Pull bulb socket 4 out of the housing. exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘 Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
Example illustration ML 350 (Sport Package socket 4.
similar) tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
왘 Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
3 Retaining screws
bulb socket 4. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
왘 Turn retaining screws 3 counterclock- Truck Center.
wise. 왘 Insert bulb socket 4 into the housing.
470
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Opening the side trim panels Vehicles without sound system*:
Opening the driver’s side trim panel: 왘 Remove the storage compartment on
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
the driver’s side.
lamp, do the following first:
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 135).
471
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the passenger side trim panel: Replacing bulbs 왘 Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
왘 Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it en-
gages.
왘 Align the respective bulb
socket 1 - 5 and turn it clockwise.
왘 Make sure bulb socket is attached
properly.
1 Lock Example illustration rear lamp passen-
ger-side 왘 Close the respective cover in the cargo
2 Cover in right side trim panel
compartment.
왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin 1 Brake lamp
2 Backup lamp 왘 Close the tailgate (컄 page 119).
into the slot of lock 1.
3 Rear fog lamp (only driver’s side), tail
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° lamp, parking and standing lamp
in direction of arrow. 4 Side marker lamp
왘 Remove cover 2. 5 Turn signal lamp
왘 Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn the respective bulb
socket 1 - 5 counterclockwise.
472
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp Adjusting headlamp aim Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a head-
lamp, follow the steps described:
왘 Park the vehicle on a level surface
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test
screen or wall.
왘 Switch the headlamps on
(컄 page 135).
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
1 License plate lamp cover the steps below:
V Vertical centerline
2 Screws
H Headlamp mounting height, measured 왘 Open hood (컄 page 341). 컄컄
왘 Loosen screws 2. from the center
왘 Remove license plate lamp cover 1. i High beam adjustments simultaneously aim
왘 Replace the tubular bulb. the low beam.
Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load.
왘 Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.
왘 Retighten screws 2.
473
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
474
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Front wiper blades ! Never open the hood when the wiper arms 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
are folded forward. engage.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
Warning! G back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
remove SmartKey from starter switch shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
Make sure the wiper blades are properly
vehicle’s on-board electronics have installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. cause windshield damage.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
For your convenience, we recommend that you
and cause injury. have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 1 Wiper blade
2 Cover
Warning! G Removing 3 Attachment
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 4 Tab
Wiper blades are components that are sub- 5 Removing
switch.
ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Press tabs 4 together and tilt wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
blade 1 to detach tabs 4 on both
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board recesses of attachment 3.
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be electronics have status 0
able to observe surrounding traffic condi- (컄 page 42). Wiper blade 1 is released on one end.
tions and could cause an accident.
왘 Maintaining its tilted position, slide
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear. wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3 in
direction of arrow 5.
475
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing 왘 Check if the wiper blade is securely ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
fastened. arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the rear
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on window.
the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm window glass without a wiper blade inserted.
when folding it back. Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed.
Improperly installed wiper blades may cause
Rear wiper blade rear window damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
1 Installing Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
2 Tab
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
3 Attachment
remove SmartKey from starter switch
4 Guide tab
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
5 Cover
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
왘 Slide the wiper blade into status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
attachment 3 in direction of Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
arrow 1. and cause injury.
왘 Make sure guide tab 4 will be placed
under cover 5 when fully inserting the
wiper blade into attachment.
왘 Let tab 2 latch into both recesses of
attachment 3.
476
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing 왘 Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper
angle with wiper arm 1 as shown. blade 2 by pushing it in direction of
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
arrow until it locks into place.
switch. 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wip-
er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in 왘 Check whether the wiper blade is
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
direction of arrow. securely fastened.
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
왘 Remove wiper blade 2. 왘 Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
electronics have status 0
(컄 page 42). window.
Installing
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It folding the wiper arm back.
could tear.
왘 Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear
window until it engages.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
왘 Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper
arm 1.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
477
Practical hints
Flat tire
478
Practical hints
Flat tire
i Vehicles with collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG 왘 Take the wheel wrench, the collapsible Lifting the vehicle
only): wheel chock, and the vehicle jack out
You can use the power outlets, except for the of the cargo compartment
(컄 page 448).
Warning! G
power outlet in the front center console, to
operate the electric air pump even when the
Vehicles with collapsible tire When jacking up the vehicle, only use the
ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to inflate the
collapsible emergency spare tire (컄 page 485). (ML 63 AMG only): jack which has been specifically approved
by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the 왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench,
vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini- out of the cargo compartment up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
mum level, the power outlets are automatically (컄 page 454). built into both sides of the vehicle. Make
switched off. This ensures that enough power re- sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
mains to start the engine. ! Depending on vehicle production date your take-up bracket.
vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type
Mounting the spare wheel jack (located under the cargo compartment The jack is intended only for lifting the
floor). If so equipped, only use this jack when vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle’s suited for performing maintenance work
Preparing the vehicle underbody can be damaged. See separate under the vehicle. To help avoid personal in-
instructions for scissors-type jack.
왘 Prepare the vehicle as described jury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle dur-
(컄 page 478). ing a wheel change.
Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Never get beneath the vehicle while it is sup-
ported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
왘 Take the Minispare wheel out of the away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
cargo compartment (컄 page 453). Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle. 컄컄
479
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 One collapsible wheel chock is includ- 왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and
Always firmly set parking brake and block
ed with the vehicle tool kit another sizeable object behind the
wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable
(컄 page 448). For information on set- wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
objects before raising vehicle with jack. Do
ting up the collapsible wheel chock, wheel being changed.
not disengage parking brake while the vehi-
see (컄 page 452).
cle is raised.
Changing wheel on a slight decline
Make sure that the ground on which the ve-
hicle is standing and where you place the Warning! G Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If neces- on a level surface. However, should
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or circumstances require you to do so on a
sary, use a large underlay. On slippery sur-
on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the slight decline, place the wheel chock and
faces, such as tiled floors, you should use a
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you another sizeable object as follows:
non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
or others.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
Changing wheel on a level surface
not be able to achieve its load-bearing ca-
pacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
480
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Place wheel chock (or another sizeable 왘 Place wheel chock (or another sizeable
object) in front of both wheels on the object) behind both wheels on the side
side opposite to the side on which the opposite to the side on which the wheel
wheel is to be changed. is to be changed.
481
Practical hints
Flat tire
482
Practical hints
Flat tire
483
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the new wheel ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be 왘 Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
1 Wheel bolt for 18", 19" and 20" light repaired immediately. Do not continue to bolt and push it on the wheel hub.
alloy wheels and collapsible tire (AMG drive under these circumstances! Contact
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
vehicles) an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
slightly.
2 Wheel bolt for 17" light alloy wheels or Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Minispare wheel (located in vehicle tool 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
kit (컄 page 448)) ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
come off. This could cause an accident.
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount-
ing 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare wheel. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts. Warning! G
The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
wheel will damage the vehicle’s brakes. bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
wheel hub. vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
484
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is ! The cigarette lighter* (컄 page 285) or the
power outlet in the front center console
properly mounted. (컄 page 288) is not designed for use with the
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric electric air pump. Use the power outlet in the
pump (컄 page 485) before lowering the rear center console or in the cargo compartment
vehicle. (컄 page 288) for electric air pump operation.
Electric air pump
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
1 Flap
to position 1.
2 On/off switch
Warning! G 3 Electrical plug or
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
Observe instructions on air pump label. 왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
screw
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
5 Union nut
button once without depressing the
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the 왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump. brake pedal.
collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be dam-
aged. 왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose 왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the with pressure gauge 4.
The electric air pump should now
cargo compartment (컄 page 454). 왘 Remove the valve cap from the switch on and inflate the collapsible
collapsible tire valve. tire. 컄컄
485
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Inflate the collapsible tire to the recom- ! Please compare the recommended tire
mended tire inflation pressure given in inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire Warning! G
the “Technical data” section inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
(컄 page 515). the spare wheel rim. Follow recommend inflation pressures.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
This takes about 5 minutes for the col-
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
lapsible tire. given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to
cause they are more likely to become punc-
the recommended tire inflation pressure given
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
Warning! G on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
etc.
왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
to position 0. and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
to avoid burning yourself when using the
equipment. or from being overheated.
486
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle 왘 Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit
items back into the storage well.
Warning! G i The removed road wheel cannot be stored in
the spare wheel well under the cargo compart-
Vehicles with collapsible tire ment floor, but should be transported in the car-
(ML 63 AMG only): go compartment wrapped in a protective cover.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
properly mounted.
tor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric sensor has been placed back into service on the
pump (컄 page 485) before lowering the 1-5 Wheel bolts vehicle.
vehicle.
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
왘 Vehicles with scissors-type jack: ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Attach ratchet to vehicle jack in such a Observe a tightening torque of
way that the word DOWN can be seen. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘 Lower the vehicle until its resting fully
on its own weight. Warning! G
왘 Vehicles with screw-type jack:
Turn crank counterclockwise. Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
왘 Vehicles with scissors-type jack: loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
Turn ratchet in Direction of DOWN. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘 Remove the jack.
487
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air to position 3 (컄 page 40) and hold it
may be sucked into the fuel system. If this there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
happens, the ? malfunction indicator until the engine runs surge-free.
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction
If the engine does not start:
indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on
and the engine may not start immediately 왘 Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
after refueling the vehicle. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
After refueling: to position 3 (컄 page 40) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission until the engine runs surge-free.
is set to P.
If the engine still does not start, do not
The gear position indicator in the multi- make any further attempts to start the
function display should be on P. engine. Contact an authorized
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call
Roadside Assistance (컄 page 298).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from i When the ? malfunction indicator lamp
the starter switch (컄 page 40). (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
above condition, it will remain illuminated until
to position 2 for at least 10 seconds the engine was cycled on and off four times in a
(컄 page 40). row.
왘 Return the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 (컄 page 40).
488
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located under the front
passenger seat. Warning! G Wear eye protection.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends to have the Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills immediate-
battery replaced at an authorized tions when handling automotive batteries. ly with clear water. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
physician if necessary.
The battery should always be sufficiently Risk of explosion.
charged in order to achieve its rated ser- Keep children away.
vice life.
If you use your vehicle mostly for Fire, open flames and smoking
short-distance trips, you will need to have are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this
the battery charge checked more batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operator’s Manual.
frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
for an extended period of time, consult an method of disposal. Many states require
Wear suitable protective cloth-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
ing, especially gloves, apron and
Center about steps you need to observe. for recycling.
faceguard.
489
Practical hints
Battery
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test- Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
ing intervals. Jump starting must only be done using the allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
As with any other battery, the battery may dis- jump-start contacts located in the engine skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
charge if the vehicle is not operated for an ex- compartment (컄 page 497). flush affected area with water and seek
tended period of time. You can connect a battery medical help if necessary.
maintenance charge unit tested and approved
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the
battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an which is flammable and explosive. Keep
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
for more information. improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
490
Practical hints
Battery
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling i With a disconnected battery you will no
clamps while the engine is running or the and reconnecting the battery longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
alternator and other electronic components start/stop button will have no effect.
could be severely damaged. Warning! G
Have the battery checked regularly by an Step 1 (Disconnecting)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and
reconnecting the battery is a complicated
i If your battery is discharged, the vehicle
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light must be jump started (컄 page 497) using the
Truck Center for further information. and technically demanding procedure that jump start contacts in the engine compartment,
also requires safety precautions to avoid the or an accessory battery charge unit* approved
Warning! G risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it
be performed by a qualified technician or an
by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the
jump start contacts in the engine compartment
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck (see separate instructions for the accessory bat-
Do not place metal objects on the battery as tery charge unit*) before any of the following
this could result in a short circuit. Center only. Please read the instructions
steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be
fully before beginning operation and only
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk jumped or charged, please contact an
undertake it if you feel fully capable of authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
of acid burns in the event of an accident. performing all of the tasks involved as de-
scribed in these instructions. Observe all 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
safety instructions and precautions when position P (컄 page 185).
handling automotive batteries 왘 Firmly depress the parking brake
(컄 page 489). Performing the tasks involved (컄 page 65).
incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66).
and impair the operating safety of the
vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you 왘 Leave the ignition switched on
or others. (컄 page 40). 컄컄
491
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 2 (Disconnecting) Step 3 (Disconnecting)
had the vehicle jump started:
앫 Leave the engine running.
앫 Complete step 1, starting with switching off
all electrical consumers.
앫 Continue with step 2.
앫 When the front passenger seat is in the most
forward position, turn off the engine.
왘 Switch off all electrical consumers.
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 489). 1 Battery cover 2 Perforated floor carpet
왘 Enter the rear passenger compartment 왘 Cut the floor carpet 2 along the
왘 Open the front passenger door.
and remove main battery cover 1. dotted white line (see illustration) until
i Open doors only when conditions are safe to you reach the perforated part. Start
do so. cutting at the point indicated by the
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the arrows. Cut carpet using a sharp object
most forward position (컄 page 44). (knife etc.).
왘 Enter the front passenger compart-
ment.
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the
most rearward position (컄 page 44).
492
Practical hints
Battery
493
Practical hints
Battery
494
Practical hints
Battery
495
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 왘 Connect the positive lead to the posi- Charging the battery 왘 Charge the battery in accordance with
tive terminal and fasten it’s cover the instructions of the battery charger
(컄 page 494). If the battery is discharged, the battery can manufacturer.
be charged using the jump-start contacts
왘 Connect the negative lead to the nega- Batteries contain materials that can harm
located in the engine compartment
tive terminal (컄 page 494). the environment if disposed of improperly.
(컄 page 498).
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
! Never invert the terminal connections! lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
i The following procedures must be carried Warning! G method of disposal. Many states require
out following any interruption of battery power sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
(e.g. due to reconnection): Never charge a battery while still installed in for recycling.
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 169). the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga-
tion module*: Time and date are set auto- being used. Gases may escape during charg-
matically. ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
앫 Synchronize the door windows
(컄 page 237). An accessory battery charge unit specially
앫 Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
(컄 page 242). tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
앫 Synchronize the power folding exterior rear available, permitting the charging of the
view mirrors* (컄 page 200). battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
496
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- parts that move when the engine is
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: started or running.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed ! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. using the jump-start contacts located
in the engine compartment ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
Never lean over batteries while connecting attempts.
(컄 page 498).
or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not attempt to start the engine using a
앫 Jump starting should only be performed battery quick charge unit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
when the engine and catalytic
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, If the engine does not run after several unsuc-
converter1 are cold. cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
flush affected area with water, and seek
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Center.
medical help if necessary.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start- ic converter1.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid ing with a higher voltage battery could
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
improper connection of jumper cables, damage the vehicle’s electrical system, or missing insulation.
smoking, etc. which will not be covered by the
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. other metal part while the other end is still at-
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient tached to a battery.
injury. cross-section and insulated terminal
Read all instructions before proceeding. clamps.
1
Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
497
Practical hints
Jump starting
498
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the If circumstances do not permit the recom-
vehicle be transported with all wheels off mended towing methods, the vehicle may Warning! G
the ground using flatbed or appropriate be towed with all wheels on the ground
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is only so far as necessary to have the vehicle If circumstances require towing the vehicle
preferable to other types of towing. moved to a safe location where the recom- with all wheels on the ground, always tow
mended towing methods can be employed. with a tow bar if
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on 앫 the engine will not run
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, the ground, the vehicle may be towed only 앫 there is a malfunction in the brake
with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to system
for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at
position 0.
a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). 앫 there is a malfunction in the power
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
system
damage radiator and supports.
This is necessary to adequately control the
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. towed vehicle.
Use the towing eyes. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
Switch off the ESP® (컄 page 102) and the the ground, make sure the automatic trans-
automatic central locking (컄 page 125). mission is in neutral position N.
499
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
500
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop ! Towing of the vehicle should only be done Installing towing eye bolt
button from the starter switch using the properly installed towing eye bolt.
(컄 page 41). Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to Depending on whether you are towing a
the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. vehicle or you are being towed, the towing
왘 Insert the SmartKey with
eye bolt can be screwed into threaded
KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch. i To signal turns while being towed with holes which are located behind covers on
hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter
왘 Switch on the ignition. switch to position 2 and activate combination the right-hand side of each bumper.
왘 Depress the brake pedal. switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner
– only the selected turn signal will operate.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warn-
neutral position N. ing flasher will operate again.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 If engaged, release the parking brake
(컄 page 57).
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the
starter switch. 1 Cover
501
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Removing cover
Warning! G
i The cover 1 is secured to the bumper by a
In order to avoid possible serious burns or plastic cord.
injury, use extreme caution when removing 왘 Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust the arrow.
pipe is extremely hot.
Vehicles with Sport Package*:
왘 Pry cover 1 with a screwdriver or
similar tool at point indicated by the
Vehicles with Sport Package* arrow.
502
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
503
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have Before replacing fuses:
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. the cause determined and rectified by an
왘 Apply parking brake (컄 page 65).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
Center. 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-
is set to P (컄 page 185).
ing. A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation
and fuse amperages. It is located in the The gear position indicator in the multi-
function display should be on P.
Warning! G cargo compartment with the vehicle tool
kit (컄 page 448). 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz The electrical fuses are located in different 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 40).
with the specified amperage for the system fuse boxes:
in question and do not attempt to repair or 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
앫 Fuse box in engine compartment switch.
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap-
(컄 page 505)
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
fuses may cause an overload leading to a 앫 Fuse box in cargo compartment
(컄 page 505) 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
the starter switch in position 0,
components and/or systems. Have the 앫 Fuse box in passenger compartment same as with the SmartKey re-
cause determined and remedied by an au- (컄 page 506) moved from the starter switch). The
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro-
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart. Any
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to
advise you on this subject.
504
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment ! The fuse box cover must be installed Removing/installing cover
properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119).
The fuse box is located on the passenger entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
side of the engine compartment. operation. 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
왘 Close the hood after checking or into the slot of lock 1 (컄 page 505).
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 341).
replacing fuses (컄 page 343). 왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°
in direction of arrow.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
왘 Remove cover 2.
The fuse box is located in the cargo com- 왘 Install cover 2 in reverse order.
partment behind the passenger side trim
panel.
505
Practical hints
Fuses
506
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
507
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
necessary technical data for your vehicle. Centers maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
508
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
in accordance with the terms of the follow- for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
ing warranties:
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
509
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 Paintwork code
can be found in the following locations: 3 VIN 2 Paintwork code
3 VIN
앫 on the certification label
i Data shown on certification label are for
앫 embossed underneath the illustration purpose only. These data are specific
passenger-side rear seat (컄 page 511) to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on
앫 on the lower edge of the windshield vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
(컄 page 511)
510
Technical data
Identification labels
511
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
512
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model ML 320 CDI (164.1221) ML 350 (164.1861)
Engine 642 272
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke engine 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.38 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 182 cu in (2987 cm3) 213 cu in (3498 cm3)
Compression ratio 17.7:1 10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 215 hp/4000 rpm 268 hp/6000 rpm2
(160 kW/4000 rpm) (200 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 400 lb-ft/1600 - 2400 rpm 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm
(543 Nm/1600 - 2400 rpm) (350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2035 mm 2404 mm
1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
513
Technical data
Engine
514
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by The tire inflation pressure should be checked
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best such as tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
possible performance in conjunction with the recommendation included with vehicle.
앫 poor handling characteristics
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your 앫 increased noise i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
vehicle and tested and approved by 앫 increased fuel consumption vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the available as standard or optional factory equip-
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
following on the tire’s sidewall: ment, but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
tires characteristics that could cause them to come Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
AMG vehicles: into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the configuration on your vehicle (Appearance
vehicles. For information on tested and result. Package, Sport Package etc.), equipping your
approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an vehicle with winter tires approved for your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck i Further information on tires and rims is vehicle model may also require the purchase of
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Center. two or four wheel rims of the recommended size
Truck Center. A placard with the recommended
Using tires other than those approved by for use with these winter tires. See an authorized
tire inflation pressure is located on the driver’s
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more
door B-pillar (컄 page 510). Some vehicles may
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited information.
have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-
Warranty. mation for driving at high speeds (컄 page 358)
or for vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 358). If such
information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
515
Technical data
Rims and tires
516
Technical data
Rims and tires
517
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
! Please compare the recommended tire in- i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in- the spare tire differs from the tire inflation pres-
flation pressure on the yellow label located on sure of the road tires.
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the col-
lapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
518
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model ML 350 ML 550 ML 63 AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.1 kW
Battery 12 V/70 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch Y7MPP33 NGK PLKR7A -1
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 19 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm) 15 – 19 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
1
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
519
Technical data
Main Dimensions
520
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
521
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Capacities
Warning! G For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
Vehicle components and their respective
Comply with all valid regulations with re- contact with your skin or clothing.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by spect to handling, storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
Mercerdes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could physician immediately.
endanger persons or the environment.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or Keep service fluids out of the reach of
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz children.
Light Truck Center.
522
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
523
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
524
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Engine oils are specifically tested for their ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
suitability in our engines and durability for They may damage the engine. Warning! G
our service intervals. Therefore, only use Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending
approved engine oils and oil filters oil additives are not covered by the During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
required for vehicles with Maintenance Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the brake fluid is continuously reduced
System. For a listing of approved engine through the absorption of moisture from the
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Air conditioning refrigerant atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous
Approved Service Products pamphlet operating conditions, this moisture content
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
(USA only), or contact an authorized
lubricating oil are used in the air condition- system, thus reducing the system’s
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
ing system. efficiency.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly ! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
required for the Maintenance System, or chang- lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
ing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer will occur.
Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter-
than those called for by the Maintenance System val.
will result in engine or emission control system
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. Only brake fluid approved by
Please follow Maintenance System recommen- Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Any
dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
so will result in engine or emission control Center will provide you with additional
system damage not covered by the information.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
525
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Fuel requirements
(gasoline engine) formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-
able and low octane fuel is used, follow these Gasoline engine
Warning! G precautions: Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
앫 The octane number (posted at the
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
It burns violently and can cause serious
possible. of both the Research Octane Number
personal injury.
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler-
(RON) and the Motor Octane Number
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
ation.
rials near gasoline! known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
Turn off the engine before refueling. if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- as two persons and no luggage. such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator used provided the ratio of any one of these
extinguish all smoking materials. pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or oxygenates to gasoline does not
operating in mountainous terrain. exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
health. exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
526
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
These blends must also meet all other fuel Gasoline additives (gasoline engine) In areas where carbon deposits may be
requirements, such as resistance to spark encountered due to lack of availability of
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. A major concern among engine gasolines which contain these additives,
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
Diesel engine by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved by us for use on
only the use of quality gasoline containing Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the
Only use commercially available vehicular
additives that prevent the build-up of Factory Approved Service Products
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
carbon deposits. pamphlet (USA only) or contact an
FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
After an extended period of using fuels authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with Center for a listing of approved product(s).
without such additives carbon deposits
improved cold flow characteristics is of- Follow directions on product label.
can build up, especially on the intake
fered in the winter months. Check with
valves and in the combustion area, leading Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
your fuel retailer.
to engine performance problems such as: This only results in unnecessary costs and
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not 앫 Warm-up hesitation may be harmful to the engine operation.
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
fuel system and engine will otherwise be 앫 Unstable idle ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor
damaged, which is not covered by the fuel quality or from blending additional fuel
앫 Knocking/pinging additives other than those tested and approved
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 Misfire by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
앫 Power loss Warranty.
527
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
528
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. Failure to use such Before the start of the winter season (or
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result once a year in hot southern regions), you
components in motor vehicle engines in a significantly shortened service life. should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also
Therefore, the following product is strongly
coolant used in such engines be regularly checked each time you bring your
recommended for use in your vehicle:
specifically formulated to protect the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Light Truck Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
529
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
530
Index
531
Index
532
Index
533
Index
Climate control 204 COMAND system see separate operating Control system submenus 151, 153, 166
Air conditioning, Cooling 214, 215 instructions Comfort* 176
Air distribution, Front 209 Combination switch 59, 60, 62, 139 Instrument cluster 167, 168
Air distribution, Rear 217 Compass 307 Lighting 170
Air recirculation mode 212 Adjustment 173 Time/Date 169
Air vents, Front 210 Calibration 174 Vehicle 173
Air volume 210 Calling up the compass 307 Coolant 345, 528
Control panel*, Rear 216 Control and operation of radio Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Control panel, Front 206 transmitters 334 mixing ratio and quantity 529
Deactivating system 208 Control system 147 Capacities 522
Defogging 212 Multifunction display 147 Checking coolant level 339, 345
Defrosting 210 Multifunction steering wheel 148 Messages in the multifunction
Rear window defroster 203 Resetting to factory default 164 display 431, 433
Residual engine heat (REST) 215 Control system menus 147 Temperature 336
Clock 27, 169 AIRMATIC*/Compass 162 Temperature display 154
Cloth upholstery, AMG menu 156 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 140
Cleaning and care of 397 AUDIO 160 Messages in the multifunction
Cockpit 24 NAV* 161 display 439
Cockpit Management and Data System Settings 163 Replacing bulbs 469
see COMAND system Standard display 154 Crossing obstacles 325
Cold tire inflation pressure 380 TEL* 180 Cruise control 244
Collapsible tire 518 Trip computer 178 Activating 246
Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) 453 Vehicle configuration 177 Messages in the multifunction
Collapsible wheel chock 452 Vehicle status message memory 162 display 416
534
Index
535
Index
536
Index
Engine Engine coolant see Coolant Exterior rear view mirrors 49, 199
Belt layout (ML 320 CDI) 512 Engine oil 343, 525 Folding 201
Belt layout (ML 350, ML 550) 512 Adding 344, 525 Power folding* 200
Belt layout (ML 63 AMG) 512 Additives 525 Synchronizing 200
Block heater (Canada only) 385 Changing 344, 525
F
Break-in recommendations 343 Checking level 343
Fastening the seat belts 51
Cleaning 391 Checking with the oil dipstick 343
Filler neck, Engine oil
Compartment 341 Consumption 343
(ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 344
Emergency engine shut-down 506 Filler neck (ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 344
Filler neck, Engine oil
Malfunction indicator lamp 29 Filler neck (ML 550, ML 63 AMG) 344
(ML 550, ML 63 AMG) 344
Maximum engine speed 146, 513, Recommended engine oils and oil
First aid kit 448
514 filters 525
Flat tire 478
Number 511 ESP® 27, 100
Collapsible tire
Starting 54 Four wheel electronic traction system
(ML 63 AMG only) 453, 518
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 55 with ESP® 100
Lifting the vehicle 479
Starting with the SmartKey 55 Messages in the multifunction
Lowering the vehicle 487
Tachometer 29, 146 display 418, 419
Minispare wheel
Technical data 513 Off-road-ESP® 103
(except ML 63 AMG) 452
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 67 Warning lamp 27, 405
Mounting the spare wheel 479
Turning off with the SmartKey 67 ETD 87, 410
Preparing the vehicle 479
Safety guidelines 76
Spare wheel 518
Expanding cargo compartment 269
Floormats 289
537
Index
538
Index
539
Index
540
Index
541
Index
Lamps, indicator and warning Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29 Light sensor
ABS 27, 400 Seat belt telltale 29, 87, 406 Messages in the multifunction
Adaptive Damping System Seat belts 407 display 438
(ADS)* 255 Seat heating* 130 Lighter see Cigarette lighter (Depending
Alarm system 107 Seat ventilation* 131 on vehicle configuration)
Battery (SmartKey with SRS 29, 72, 87, 410 Lighting, Exterior and interior 135
KEYLESS-GO*) 117 Turn signals 27 Limp-Home Mode 197, 403, 404
Battery (SmartKey) 112 Vehicle level control* 257 Loading see Vehicle loading
Brakes 27, 401, 402 Language, Setting 167 Locator lighting 138, 171
Center console 31, 411 LATCH-type child seat anchors see Lock buttons, KEYLESS-GO*
CHECK ENGINE 29, 403, 404 Children in the vehicle Outside door handle 69
Downhill Speed Regulation 250 Layout of poly-V-belt drive Locking the vehicle see Key
Engine diagnostics 29, 403, 404 (ML 320 CDI) 512 Loss of keys, Mechanical key 118
ESP® 27, 405 Layout of poly-V-belt drive Loss of keys, SmartKey 118
Fog lamps, Front/rear 135 (ML 350, ML 550) 512 Loss of keys, SmartKey with
Front passenger front air bag off 31, Layout of poly-V-belt drive KEYLESS-GO* 118
78 (ML 63 AMG) 512 Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Fuel reserve 29, 410 Leather upholstery*, Cleaning and care Booklet 509
High beam headlamps 29 of 398 Low beam headlamps
Instrument cluster 26, 28, 400, 401, Lever for cruise control 244 Messages in the multifunction
402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, License plate lamps 473 display 440
410 Messages in the multifunction Replacing bulbs 464
Off-road driving program 253 display 440 Switching on 59, 135
Parktronic* 262 Replacing bulbs 464, 473 Lubricants 522
Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 396 Lumbar support 129
542
Index
543
Index
544
Index
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 393 Parking position* Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Outside temperature see Displays Exterior rear view mirrors 177, 200 Pedals 311
Overdue maintenance service term 387 Parktronic* 31, 259 Phone see Telephone*
Overhead control panel 33 Cleaning system sensors 394 Plastic and rubber parts, cleaning 396
Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 335 Minimum distance 261 Poly-V-belt drive
Range 261 Layout (ML 320 CDI) 512
P
Switching on/off 263 Layout (ML 350, ML 550) 512
Paintwork code 510
System malfunction 263 Layout (ML 63 AMG) 512
Paintwork, Cleaning 390
System sensors 260 Positions (Memory function*) see Seats
Panic alarm 97
System sensors, Cleaning 394 Pounds per square inch see PSI
Parcel net
Warning indicators 25, 262 Power assistance 312
Front passenger footwell 283
Parts service 508 Power outlets 287
Front seat backrests 283
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Power seat see Seats, Power
Parking 65, 315
Front passenger front air bag off Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240
On hills 65
indicator lamp Convenience closing feature 238
Over things that burn, Potential
Passenger compartment 334 Opening/closing 240
consequences 65, 335
Fuse box 506 Stopping 238
Parking brake 57, 65
Interior lighting 142 Summer opening feature 237
Lamps, Indicator and warning 401
Interior rear view mirror 33 Synchronizing 242
Messages in the multifunction
Parcel net in front passenger Power washer 390
display 429
footwell 283
Releasing 57
Parking lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display 441
Replacing bulbs 468
545
Index
546
Index
547
Index
Seat heating* see Seats Service intervals see Maintenance, Service Memory function* 133
Seat ventilation* see Seats indicator Resetting all, Control system 164
Seating capacity 353 Service life Selective, SmartKey 112
Seats 43, 127 Tires 349 Selective, SmartKey with
Adjusting 43 Service see Maintenance KEYLESS-GO* 117
Cushion depth, Multicontour Service system see Maintenance System Time 169
seat* 129 Service, Parts 508 Vehicle configuration 177
Folding the backrest forward 269 Settings Vehicle level control* 255
Heating* 130 Adaptive Damping System Shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 194
Lumbar support 129 (ADS)* 255 Shifting
Memory function* 133 Air suspension* 254 Automatic transmission 54
Multicontour seat* 129 Clock 169 Shifting, Automatic transmission 183
Returning seat backrest to original Comfort functions* 176 Side impact air bags 78
position 271 Control system menus 150, 152 Side marker lamps
Ventilation* 131 Control system submenus 151, 153, Cleaning lenses 393
Securing cargo 268 166 Messages in the multifunction
Cargo tie-down rings 268 Date 153, 166, 169 display 441
Hooks 269 Daytime running lamp mode 170 Replacing bulbs 464, 469, 472
Selector lever see Gear selector lever Factory, SmartKey 112 Side windows see Power windows
Self-test Factory, SmartKey with Sidewall 381
Lamps in the instrument cluster 400 KEYLESS-GO* 116 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
OCS 84 Individual, Vehicle 163 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey with
Tele Aid 295 Instrument cluster 167 KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicle battery 489 Language, multifunction display 167, Snow chains 385
Service and warranty information 10 168 Snow tires see Winter tires
Lighting 170
548
Index
Spare wheel 518 Steering wheel 46 Suspension tuning see Air suspension pro-
Bolts 450 Adjustment, Electrically* 48 gram*
Mounting 479 Adjustment, Manually 47 Symbols used in this Operator’s
Wheel bolts 484 Buttons 30, 148 Manual 16
Spare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) 452 Cleaning 397
T
Speed settings Steering wheel gearshift control
Tachometer 29, 146
Cruise control 246 Automatic transmission 193
Overspeed range 146
Speedometer 27 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 301
Tail lamps 471
Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotation Storage compartments 34, 279
Cleaning lenses 393
SRS 86 Cup holder 284
Messages in the multifunction
Indicator lamp 29, 410 Cup holders 284
display 442
Messages in the multifunction Door pockets 34
Replacing bulbs 464, 472
display 410 Front center console 281
Tailgate
Standing lamps 135 Glove box 279
Closing from the inside,
Replacing bulbs 463, 464, 468, 471 Parcel net, Front passenger
Electrically* 122
Standing water, Driving through 324 footwell 283
Closing from the outside
Starter switch 25, 40 Parcel nets, Front seat backrest 283
(vehicles without
Positions 40 Rear seats, In front of 282
KEYLESS-GO*) 123
Starting difficulties, Engine 57 Storage/telephone* compartment
Opening 119
Starting, Engine 54 Armrest, Front 281
Opening from the inside,
Steep terrain, Driving 322 Storing tires 350
Electrically* 121
Steering column 47, 48 Stranded vehicle 503
Unlocking and opening the tailgate in
Submenus see Control system submenus
an emergency 456
Sun visors 201
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
549
Index
550
Index
Temperature Tire and Loading Information Collapsible tire, Spare wheel 518
Coolant 154 Placard 352 Combination low tire pressure/TPMS
Display mode, Status indicator 168 Terminology 379 malfunction telltale, USA only 27
Interior temperature 209 Tire Identification Number see TIN Direction of rotation, Spinning 351
Interior temperature, setting see Tire inflation pressure Driving instructions 315
Climate control or Automatic climate Checking manually 359 Hydroplaning 316
control (3-zone)* Checking tire pressure electronically Important guidelines 348
Outside temperature 155 with the Advanced Tire Pressure Important notes, Tire inflation
Sensor, Interior temperature 206, Monitoring System (Advanced pressure 358
220 TPMS)*, (Canada only) 365 Inflation pressure 340, 357, 359
Sensor, Outside temperature 146 Checking tire pressure electronically Information placard 352
Setting display unit 155 with the Tire Pressure Monitoring Inspection 349
Tether attachment points, see Children in System (TPMS), (USA only) 362 Load rating 370, 371, 381
the vehicle Recommended tire inflation Loading Information 352
Three-zone Automatic climate control see pressure 357 Loading terminology 379
Automatic climate control (3-zone) * Tires 348, 515 Loading the vehicle 351
Ticket holder 284 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Low tire pressure telltale 408
Tie-down rings 268 System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada Low tire pressure telltale, Canada
Tightening torque only) 365 only 27
Wheel bolts 487 Air pressure 379 Maximum load 382
Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding Care and maintenance 349 Messages in the multifunction
sunroof* Chains 385 display 408
Time 169 Cleaning 350 Minispare wheel
TIN 374, 381 Collapsible tire (except ML 63 AMG) 452
(ML 63 AMG only) 453 Ply composition and material
used 382
551
Index
Problems under-/overinflation 369 Tongue Weight Rating see TWR Tread depth 350, 384
Retreads 348 Tools 448 Treadwear indicators 382
Rims and tires 515 Top tether Trip computer 178
Rotating 351 Children in the vehicle 94 Trip odometer, resetting 146
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 360 Towing Turn signal lamps
Service life 349 Trailer 191, 328, 331 Cleaning lenses 393
Sizes 370 Towing eye bolt 501 Messages in the multifunction
Snow chains 385 Towing the vehicle 501, 503 display 443
Spare wheel 479 Tow-starting 497, 499 Replacing bulbs 464
Spare wheel, Collapsible tire 518 Traction 378, 382 Turn signals 60
Speed rating 317, 372, 382 4-ETS, Driving safety systems 98, Additional in mirrors 464
Storing 350 104 Bulbs 464, 472
Temperature 358, 378 Trailer Cleaning lenses 393
Terminology 379 Attaching 330 Indicator lamps 27
TIN 374, 381 Checking weights 330 Turning off the engine 67
Tire Identification Number see TIN Electrical connections 329 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 382
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Hitch* 328
U
(TPMS), (USA only) 362 Loading 329
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
TPMS malfunction telltale 408 Towing 328, 331
Standards 382
Traction 316, 378, 382 Weights and ratings 329
Units, Settings
Tread 382 Transfer case 198
Speedometer 168
Tread depth 350, 384 Transmission position indicator 147
Temperature 168
Treadwear indicators 382 Transmission see Automatic transmission
Unlocking the vehicle see Key
Vehicle maximum load on 382 Traveling abroad 334
Wear pattern 383 Tread 382
Winter tires 384
552
Index
Uphill driving Vehicle and trailer weights and Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
Cruise control 246 ratings 329 (Tele Aid) 301
Upholstery Vehicle care 389 Vehicle status message memory
Cleaning and care of 397 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN menu 162
Useful features 279 Vehicle jack 450, 451 Vehicle tool kit 448
Vehicle level control* 255 Vehicle washing 391
V
Messages in the multifunction VIN 511
Vehicle
display 447 Voice control system*
Battery 489
Vehicle lighting 340 Button on multifunction steering
Break-in period 310
Vehicle loading wheel 30, 148
Care 389
Cargo compartment cover blind 271 Hands-free microphone 33
Control system, Settings menu 163
Cargo net* 272
Dimensions 520 W
Cargo tie-down rings 268
Locking/unlocking 38, 65, 110 Warning indicators
Expanding cargo compartment 269
Locking/unlocking in an Parktronic* 262
Hooks 269
emergency 455 Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
Load limit 353
Modifications and alterations, Operat- warning
Loading instructions 266
ing safety 17 Warning sounds
Loading terminology 379
Proper use of 17 Exterior lamps 135
Parcel nets 283
Total load limit 382 Parking brake 58
Roof rails 266
Towing 499 Parktronic* 263
Terminology 379
Washing 389 Seat belt telltale 84
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 382
Weights 521 Warranty coverage 10, 509
553
Index
554
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle
properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.